Teriostar Maintenance Manual

8/10/2019 Teriostar Maintenance Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/teriostar-maintenance-manual 1/379

LP-1010

Black-and-White Raster Plotter

Maintenance Manual

U00090001101

Seiko I Infotech Inc.



U00090001100 April 2005

U00090001101 January 2007

©Seiko I Infotech 2005, 2007

Reprinting of this manual without permission is prohibited.

The content of this manual may be changed without notice.

is a registered trademark of Seiko Instruments Inc.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox, Inc.

HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard (U.S.A.)



i

This manual contains the information necessary to conduct the primary maintenance for the

black-and-white raster plotter LP-1010 (hereinafter called the device) at the site.

The manual is intended for the maintenance personnel who have mastered assembly,

disassembly, and adjustment of the device. The responsible personnel will perform maintenance

operations using necessary tools and measuring instruments.

Before starting the intended maintenance operations, be sure to completely read "Safety

Precautions" and "Operational Precautions" described from the next page so that you can inspect

and maintain the deveice safely and correctly.

Foreword



ii

Example of symbols:

This symbol ( ) denotes items that require special care while executing a

certain procedure or operation.

This symbol ( ) denotes items that are forbidden.

The indication at left means that "Contact is prohibited."

This symbol ( ) denotes items you should follow to prevent accidents or

injury.

Safety Precautions

The following symbols are used in this manual to ensure the proper use of the plotter and to

prevent the plotter from being damaged.

Follow the instructions marked with these symbols.

Serious personal injury or death:

Failure to follow the guidelines marked with this

symbol could result in serious personal injury or death.WARNING

CAUTION

Minor personal injury or product and/or peripheraldamage:

Failure to follow the guidelines marked with this

symbol could result in minor personal injury or

product and/or peripheral damage.



iii

DO NOT touch any of the parts inside the plotter with a "HIGH VOLTAGE" label (transfer/

separator) attached as it may result in electric shock.

DO NOT touch any of the parts inside the plotter with a "HIGH TEMPERATURE" label

attached as it may result in severe burns.

DO NOT disassemble or remodel the plotter. DO NOT repair the plotter by yourself. Doing so

may cause fire, electric shock or other accidents.

DO NOT throw the toner cartridge or waste toner bottle into fire or place them near heat as they

could explode or catch fire leading to serious accidents and/or bodily injury.

Before replacing a maintenance component, be sure to turn the device off and unplug the power

cable from the power outlet. Failure to observe the instructions may result in electric shock.

DO NOT disconnect or connect the power cable with wet hands. Doing so may lead to electric

shock.

If the toner accidentally gets into the eye during the maintenance, wash it off with clean running

water instead of rubbing it and consult a doctor immediately. If the toner gets on the skin or

clothing, immediately wash it off with soapy water.

Pay attention not to get injured by a cutter or screwdriver during the maintenance and damage

the device.

In order to ensure the safe operation of the device heed all of the cautions and warnings contained

throughout this manual.

Warning

Caution



iv

Warning labels

Warning labels are affixed to this device at the locations shown in the following figure.

You should understand what these warning labels say and perform the inspection and

maintenance work.

2b "Caution when dealing with paper jam" label

3 "WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE" label

1 "Caution: high temperature" label

2a "Caution when dealing with

paper jam" label

4 "Gas spring

expiration date" label



v

1 "Caution: HIGH TEMPERATURE" label (affixed to the inside of the fixation door)

This label cautions you not touch this area due to high temperature. The fixation

device will become hot. Take care to avoid contact when dealing with paper jams.

2 "Caution when dealing with paper jams" label

This label indicates the direction that jammed paper should be pulled out when paper

is jammed in the fixation device. Follow the directions on the label to remove the

paper.

3 "WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE" label

This label cautions against contact due to high voltage application. As it is dangerous,

never contact this area.

4 "Gas spring expiration date" label

This caution label indicates the date when the gas spring is consumed, and the user

must replace the gas spring before the indicated date expires.



vi

Precaution on Maintenance

Before and during the inspection and maintenance of the device, observe the following

precautions.

1 Before the intended inspection and maintenance, hear the condition and/or trouble of this

device from the user. Although the machine is sound, the user may use the toner/paper that

is not supplied by Seiko I Infotech (SIIT) or the data may be error. For this reason,

certainly verify the current situation and determine the cause of trouble, if any.

2 When disassembling the device to, for example, replace a component, you should

examine and know the machine configuration completely so that you can smoothly

reassemble the machine.

3 Ensure sufficient maintenance space.

4 Pay attentimon not to spill the fresh/waste toner. Before the intended inspection and

maintenance, spread a sheet or cloth on the floor to protect the floor mat from soiling.

5 Do not keep the top cover (clamshell) opened for a long period of time. Otherwise, the

exposure drum will be deteriorated due to photo-fatigue. Cover the drum with a black bag

when the clamshell is removed.

6 Do not touch the photodrum surface with bare hands. Otherwise, the drum will be

degraded. If you touch the surface, completely wipe it with a clean cloth such as Bencot.

The poor image quality brought from the bare-hand contact can be removed by outputting

about fifteen sheets of paper.

7 Do not open the top cover with the photodrum removed. Otherwise, the cleaner will

topple and the waste toner is spilled to soil the machine interior.

8 Do not get any ferromagnetic material such as bolt and washer close to the developing

sleeve. If the part is attracted by the magnet roll, be sure to remove it to prevent the drumfrom being damaged.

9 Do not run the developing sleeve in the reverse direction.



CONTENTS-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Foreword i

Safety Precautions ii

Warning labels iv

Precaution on Maintenance vi

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure 1-1

1.1 Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure 1-1

1.2 Necessary Tools 1-3

1.3 External View and Nomenclatures 1-3

1.4 Maintenance Space 1-7

1.5 Version Upgrade of System Firmware 1-9

1.5.1 Version Upgrade by Version upgrade CF Card 1-9

1.5.2 Version Upgrade by Maintenance CF Card 1-11

1.5.3 Other Version Upgrade Operations 1-11

1.5.4 Errors during CF Card Version Upgrade 1-13

1.5.5 Explanation of Version Upgrade CF Card 1-17

1.5.6 Explanation of Maintenance CF Card 1-19

1.5.7 Creation Method of Maintenance CF Card in Service Center 1-19

1.5.8 Version Upgrade by Web Browser 1-21

1.5.9 Version Upgrade by FTP Protocol 1-23

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode 2-1

2.1 Overview of Engine Maintenance Mode Function and Operation 2-2

2.1.1 Entering the Engine Maintenance Mode 2-2

2.1.2 Engine Maintenance Mode by Control Panel 2-3

2.2 Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu 2-4



CONTENTS-2

2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter Oper2.3 Operation Method of Mainte-

nance and Diagnostic Menus 2-6

2.3.1 Maintenance Code 01 "ODOMETER" (Total Print Distance) 2-6

2.3.2 Maintenance Code 02 "LIFE" (part replacement information) 2-10

2.3.3 Maintenance Code 03 "CLEANING" (part cleaning information) 2-132.3.4 Maintenance Code 04 "ERROR LOG" (Unrecoverable Error Log) 2-16

2.3.5 Maintenance Code 05 "JAM LOG" (Paper Jam Error Log) 2-20

2.3.6 Maintenance Code 06 "SENSOR" (Sensor) 2-23

2.3.7 Maintenance Code 07 "THERMISTOR" (Thermistor) 2-26

2.3.8 Maintenance Code 08 "ACTUATOR" (Actuator) 2-28

2.3.9 Maintenance Code 09 "TEST" (Test) 2-32

2.3.10 Maintenance Code 10 "PRINT" (Print) 2-37

2.3.11 Maintenance Code 11 "REGULATE" (Adjustment) 2-42

2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Parameter) 2-51

2.3.13 Maintenance Code 13 "NVRAM" (NVRAM) 2-592.3.14 Maintenance Code 14 "USER PARAMETER"

(User-defined engine parameter) 2-62

2.3.15 Maintenance Code 15 "ROLL WIDTH" (Paper roll print width) 2-66

2.3.16 Maintenance Code 16 "PROCESS LOG"

(Process Cartridge Consumption Log) 2-70

2.4 Message 2-7

Chapter 3 Maintenance Person Mode 3-1

3.1 Enter to Maintenance Person Mode 3-1

3.2 Functions of Maintenance Person Mode Menus 3-3

3.3 How to turn on the maintenance person mode on Web 3-5

3.4 Maintenance Person's Special Web Functions 3-5



CONTENTS-3

Chapter 4 Regular Inspection 4-1

4.1 Regular Inspection Operation Items and Procedure 4-2

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error) 5-1

5.1 Type of Error Messages 5-1

5.2 Troubleshooting Against Operator Call Error 5-2

5.3 Operator Notice Warning 5-3

5.4 Warning 5-5

5.4.1 Communication Error 5-5

5.4.2 PDL Warning 5-6

5.4.3 Engine Warning 5-8

5.4.4 Main Warning 5-8

5.5 Service Call Error 5-9

5.5.1 Engine Error 5-9

5.5.2 System Error 5-9

5.5.3 Controller Error 5-9

5.6 Error Log 5-13

5.6.1 Classification of Error/Warning 5-13

5.6.2 Format of Message 5-13

5.6.3 Log Registration Format 5-13

5.6.4 Error Log Print Item 5-14

5.6.5 Type of Error Log 5-14

5.7 Error Log Classification List 5-16

5.8 Job Log 5-17

5.8.1 Job Log Print Item 5-17



CONTENTS-4

5.9 Replacement of PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (Main Control Board) 5-19

5.10 Serial Number Unset 5-20

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure) 6-1

6.1 How to Read This Manual 6-1

6.1.1 Overview of Engine Troubleshooting 6-1

6.1.2 Terminology 6-3

6.2 Leve-1 Troubleshooting 6-5

6.2.1 Unrecoverable Error Codes and Description 6-5

6.2.2 Paper Jam Error Codes and Description 6-6

6.3 Leve-2 Troubleshooting 6-7

6.3.1 "Unrecoverable error code" Troubleshooting 6-7

6.3.2 "Paper jam error code" Troubleshooting 6-15

6.3.3 Troubleshooting by symptom 6-27

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure) 7-1

7.1 Print Quality Troubleshooting Method 7-1

7.1.1 Type of Engine Test Patterns 7-2

7.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure 7-4

7.2.1 Plotting Specification and Measuring Method 7-4

7.2.2 Corrective Measure in Case of Plotting Specification Failure 7-6

7.3 Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality Failure 7-7

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly) 8-1

8.1 How to Read This Manual 8-18.1.1 Rules for Disassembly/Assembly 8-1

8.1.2 Covers 8-2



CONTENTS-5

8.2 Replacing the Parts 8-3

8.2.1 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MRC (MRC 2 Board) 8-3

8.2.2 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-USB (USB 2 board) 8-9

8.2.3 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MEC (MEC board) 8-10

8.2.4 Replacing the Controller Fan 8-118.2.5 Replacing the Paper Size Sensor and Paper Jam Sensor 8-13

8.2.6 Replacing the Cutter Unit 8-13

8.2.7 Replacing the High Voltage Power Unit 8-19

8.2.8 Replacing the Low Voltage Power Unit 8-20

8.2.9 Replacing the Power Switch 8-21

8.2.10 Replacing the Filter 8-23

8.2.11 Replace the waste toner bottle switch and the waste toner sensor. 8-23

8.2.12 Replacing the Fixation Unit 8-25

8.2.13 Replacing the Wheel Unit and Clutch ASSY 3-30

8.2.14 Replacing the Main Motor 3-338.2.15 Replacing the Transport (suction). 3-34

8.2.16 Replacing the Halogen Lamp on Fuser Unit 3-36

8.2.17 Replacing the BL01 ASSY (suction fan) 3-37

8.2.18 Replacing the Thermistor on Fixation 3-38

8.2.19 Replacing the Fan on Fuser 3-39

8.2.20 Replacing the Charger Fan 3-40

8.2.21 Replacing the Process Unit 3-42

8.2.22 Replacing the LED Head 3-43

8.2.23 Replacing the Transfer Separator 3-47

8.2.24 Replacing the Charge Elimination ASSY (charge elimination LED) 3-488.2.25 Replacing the Developer 3-49

8.2.26 Replacing the Developer DV Spacer 3-52

8.2.27 Replacing the Developer Blade 3-53

8.2.28 Replacing the INT1 (Upper Door Interlock Switch) 3-55

8.2.29 Replacing the INT3 (Buffer Door Interlock Switch) 3-56

8.2.30 Replacing the Paper Registration Sensor 3-57

8.2.31 Replacing the Manual Feed Sensor 3-58

8.2.32 Replacing the Control Panel 3-59

8.2.33 Replacing the Roll Paper Feed Motors (FM01and FM02) 3-60

8.2.34 Replacing the Sensors on Roll Paper Feed Unit(PS11, PS12, PS21, PS22, PS31, and PS32) 3-62

8.2.35 Replacing the Gas Spring 3-63

8.2.36 Replacing the heat roller 8-64



CONTENTS-6

8.2.37 Replacing the backup roller 8-67

8.2.38 Cleaning Primary Wire 8-69

8.2.39 Exchanging Primary Wire 8-72

8.2.40 Cleaning and Exchanging Cleaner Blade 8-76

8.2.41 Cleaning of OPC Photosensitive drum 8-80

Chapter 9 Adjustment 9-1

9.1 Adjusting the Voltage and Current of High Voltage Power Unit 9-1

9.1.1 Adjusting the Primary Charger Load Current 9-2

9.1.2 Developer AC Bias 9-3

9.1.3 Developer DC Bias 9-4

9.1.4 Transfer Load Current 9-5

9.1.5 Separator AC Bias 9-6

9.2 Verification and Adjustment Voltage of Low voltage Power Unit 9-7

9.3 Adjusting the Light Emitting STB Width of LED Head 9-8

9.4 Adjusting the Plotting Specification Items 9-9

9.4.1 Adjusting the Fixation Nip Pressure 9-10

9.4.2 Adjusting the Skew/Slack 9-11

9.4.3 Adjusting the Cut Squareness 9-14

9.4.4 Adjusting the Cut Length Accuracy 9-15

9.4.5 Adjusting the Plotting Length Accuracy 9-17

9.4.6 Adjusting the Top Edge Registration 9-19

9.4.7 Adjusting the Center Registration 9-21

9.5 Adjusting the Paper Top Edge Dead Space 9-24

9.6 Adjusting the LED Head Joint 9-25



CONTENTS-7

Chapter 10 Operational Description 10-1

10.1 Features 10-2

10.2 Engine Specifications 10-3

10.3 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part 10-4

10.4 Basic Operation (Overall Operation) 10-5

10.4.1 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration 10-5

10.4.2 Overview of Device Configuration 10-6

10.4.3 Configuration Block Diagram 10-8

10.4.4 Outline of Operations 10-9

10.5 Electrophotographic Process Operation 10-1110.5.1 Primary Charging 10-11

10.5.2 Photosensitive Drum 10-12

10.5.3 Exposure 10-13

10.5.4 Development 10-14

10.5.5 Transfer 10-15

10.5.6 Separation 10-16

10.5.7 Cleaning 10-16

10.5.8 Charge Elimination 10-17

10.5.9 Fusing 10-17

10.6 Operation of Drive and Feed Systems 10-19

10.6.1 Drive System 10-19

10.6.2 Paper feed system 10-19

10.7 Control System 10-21

10.7.1 Process Control 10-21

10.7.2 Paper Feed Control 10-21

10.8 Controller 10-22

10.8.1 Description of Controller Specifications 10-22

10.8.2 Hardware Configuration 10-23

10.8.3 Data Processing Flowchart 10-24



CONTENTS-8

Appendix A MEC Board Setup and LED Indication A-1

A.1 Setting the DIP Switches A-1

A.1.1 Setting 8-bit DIP Switch on MEC Board (SW4) A-1

A.1.2 Setting DIP Switch SW2 on MEC Board A-2A.1.3 Setting DIP Switch SW3 on MEC Board A-2

A.2 LED Indication A-3

A.2.1 LED indication on MEC board A-3

A.3 Reset Switch (SW1) on MEC Board A-6

Appendix B RFU Board Setup B-1

B.1 Setup of DIP Switch B-1

B.1.1 DIP Switch on the RFU Board B-1

Appendix C Setup MRC2 Board Setup C-1

C.1 Setup of DIP Switches C-1

C.1.1 DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW7) C-1

C.1.2 DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW2) C-1

C.1.3 DIP Switch (SW3) on MRC2 Board C-2

C.1.4 DIP Switch (SW1) on MRC2 Board C-2

Appendix D Menu Structure D-1

Appendix E Electrical Connection Diagram E-1



CONTENTS-9

Tables

Table 1-1 Necessary Tool List 1-2

Table 1-2 Other Version Upgrade List 1-11

Table 1-3 CF Card Version Upgrade Error List 1-14Table 1-4 CF Card Version Upgrade Error List 1-15

Table 1-5 Engine F/W Version Upgrade Error List 1-15

Table 1-6 Errors during Scanner Firmware Version Up List 1-16

Table 1-7 Errors during CF Card Version Up (for TECHCARD only) List 1-16

Table 2-1 Valid Maintenance Codes and Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu List 2-4

Table 2-2 Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes 2-19

Table 2-3 Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes 2-22

Table 2-4 Engine Control Parameter List 2-53

Table 4-1 Regular Inspection Item List 4-2

Table 5-1 If a Job has been Left at Powering on 5-4

Table 5-2 Ethernet Warning List 5-5

Table 5-3 Mail Warning List 5-5

Table 5-4 USB Warning List 5-6

Table 5-5 PDL Warning List 5-6

Table 5-5 PDL Warning List 5-7

Table 5-6 Engine Control Warning List 5-8

Table 5-7 List of Main Warnings 5-8

Table 5-8 PDL Module Error List 5-9

Table 5-9 Engine Control Module Error List 5-10

Table 5-10 Operation Module Error List 5-10

Table 5-11 Main Module Error List 5-11

Table 5-12 Setup Error List 5-11

Table 5-13 Panel Control Module Error List 5-12

Table 5-14 Spool Module Error List 5-12

Table 5-15 Error Log Print Item 5-14

Table 5-16 Error Log Classification List 5-16

Table 5-17 Job Log Print Item 5-17



CONTENTS-10

Table 6-1 Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes (1/2) 6-4

Table 6-1 Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes (2/2) 6-5

Table 6-2 Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes 6-6

Table 7-1 Engine Test Pattern List 7-2Table 7-2 Image Quality Defects List 7-7

Table 8-1 Maintenance Priority 8-69

Table 9-1 Corresponding Table between LED Light Quantity and Light Emitting STB Value 9-8

Table 9-2 Adjustment Items in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure 9-9

Table 10-1 Symbol Table 10-7



CONTENTS-11

Figures

Figure 1-1 Maintenance Work Procedure Flow 1-1

Figure 1-2 External View and Nomenclatures (Front) 1-3

Figure 1-3 External View and Nomenclatures (right side / rear) 1-4Figure 1-4 External View and Nomenclatures (Interior) 1-5

Figure 1-5 External View and Nomenclatures (Control Panel) 1-6

Figure 1-6 Maintenance Space 1-7

Figure 1-7 Card Slot on Device 1-8

Figure 1-8 Directory Configuration in CF Card Version Upgrade 1-17

Figure 1-9 Directory Configuration of Maintenance CF Card 1-18

Figure 1-10 Extract File Configuration 1-19

Figure 8-1 Nomenclatures of Covers 8-2

Figure 10-1 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part 10-4

Figure 10-2 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration 10-5

Figure 10-3 Overview of Device Configuration Drawing 10-6

Figure 10-4 Configuration Block Diagram 10-8

Figure 10-5 Controller Block Diagram 10-23

Figure 10-6 Data Processing Flowchart 10-24



1-1

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure


Chapter 1 describes the primary maintenance work procedure, necessary tools, and names of

components of this device.

Also, subsection 1.5 describes a method for updating the version of the system firmware.

1.1 Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure

The maintenance work is classified into the regular checking maintenance based on the

Maintenance Agreement and the maintenance if a trouble occurs.

The work procedure flows of respective cases are shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Maintenance Work Procedure Flow

Check the contents of trouble and the

situations if a trouble occurs.

Perform the troubleshooting.

· If controller is error (See Chapter 5)

· If engine is error (See Chapter 6)· If image quality is poor (See Chapter 7)

Replace a faulty part (See Chapter 8)

Adjust the replaced part or make adjustment

as necessary (See Chapter 9)

Check that the trouble is removed.

Start

Grasp the situations (problems, complaints,

etc.) of the device.

Check and clean the parts (See Chapter 4)

Replace parts as necessary (See Chapter 8)

or adjust (See Chapter 9).

Check by plotting that no problem occurs.

Maintenance if a

trouble occurs

Regular checking

maintenance

Regular check/Incase of a trouble

End

End



1-3


1.3 External View and Nomenclatures

Figures 1-2 to 1-5 respectively show the external view and nomenclatures of the device.

Figure 1-2 External View and Nomenclatures (Front)

1 Roll 1 drawer (door 1)

2 Roll 2 drawer (door 2)

3 Manual feed drawer (door 4)

4 Paper unfeeding outlet

5 Top door (door 6)6 Fixation door (door 7)

7 Manual paper feed holder (door 8)

8 Manual feed inlet

9 Toner cover

0 Control panel

A Waste toner bottle door



1-4

Figure 1-3 External View and Nomenclatures (right side / rear)

1 Main power switch

2 Power cord

3 Parallel interface connector

4 USB interface connector

5 Ethernet interface connector

6 Cutter door (door 5)

7 Cutter inside door (door 9)

8 Cutter door lower small window (door 10)



1-5


Figure 1-4 External View and Nomenclatures (Interior)

1 Paper feed knob

2 Paper flange



1-6

Figure 1-5 External View and Nomenclatures (Control Panel)

2 LCD

The status of this device, as well as a

menu to set the device functions

appear on a 20- digit, 2-line display.

1 LEDs

The device status is indicated

by LEDs on, flashing, and off.

3 Keys

Use these keys to set device

functions.



1-7


1.4 Maintenance Space

Figure 1-6 shows the spaces necessary to maintain the device.

Figure 1-6 Maintenance Space

(Unit: mm)

Installation space

Maintenance space

700 5 5 2

300

3 0 0

8 0 0

9 0 0

2054

2554

1154 600

700

6 0 0

1 6 5 2

2 0 5 2



1-8

1.5 Version Upgrade of System Firmware

This section describes how to version upgrade the system firmware of the device. The device is

equipped with multiple firmware items. It is possible to version upgrade items collectively.

1.5.1 Version Upgrade by Version upgrade CF Card

The version upgrade CF card is used to upgrade all firmware versions collectively. (This card is

common to plotter and MF models.)

<Version-upgrade applies to the following firmware:>

- Controller firmware

- Engine firmware

- Scanner firmware (used in MF model)

<Procedures>

1 Turn on the device and execute MENU PRINT to output the setup list.

2 Turn off the device.

3 Insert the version upgrade CF card into the controller CF card slot. Check DIP

switches 1 and 2 are both in OFF position. (Default is OFF position.)

Card slotDIP switch for version upgrade.

Version upgrade: bit 1=OFF, 2=OFF

Figure 1-7 Card Slot on Device



1-9


4 Turn on the device.

In the version upgrade process, the old firmware version is automatically erased and

the new version is written in the device. After the start is booted correctly, the first

screen appears on the LCD and the process is initiated.

LCD displayed

S Y S T E M CO P YS - E R A S I N G X X X ( N o t e 2)

S Y S T E M C O P YWR I T I N G X X X

S Y S T E M C O P Y

C O P Y F I N I S H E D

S Y S T E M C O P Y

5 Press the Power key for several seconds to turn it off.

6 Pull out the version upgrade CF card from the controller CF card slot.

7 Turn on the device to reboot the system.

8 Execute MENU PRINT to output the setup list and check the system firmware is

correctly version-upgraded.

Normal termination

S Y S T E M C O P YC O P Y I N G X X X X X X ( N o t e 1 )

Note 1: Description of XXXXXXX

During the version upgrade,

"ENGINE" is displayed for

engine firmware.

"SCANNER" is displayed for

scanner firmware.

"SYSTEM" is displayed for

controller firmware.

Note 2: The down-counter for

copying or erasing the

controller firmware is

displayed.

Note: For the MF model, the scanner firmware is not rewritten if its version is

same as that registered to the device.

Note: If the engine firmware version is the same as or older than the one registered

to the device, the overwrite process is not executed.

Note: The version-upgrade of the controller firmware is executed unconditionally.



1-10

1.5.2 Version Upgrade by Maintenance CF Card

The maintenance CF card can version upgrade individual firmware items one by one. The

version-upgrade using this card is executed by the control panel operation.

(1) LP-1010 version upgrading operation (maintenance open)

<Procedures>


2 Insert the maintenance CF card into the controller CF card slot.

Check DIP switches 1 and 2 are both in OFF position. (Default is OFF position.)


4 Access the FUNCTION menu, specify the target firmware item, and upgrade its

version.

system.bin: Total system (controller firmware + engine firmware)

Pxxxxx.bin: RIP controller firmware (xxxxxx: version)

Exxxxx.bin: Engine firmware (xxxxxx: version)

Sxxxxx.bin: Scanner firmware (xxxxxx: version) (for MF model)

Control panel (example of controller firmware version upgrade )

* s y s t e m . b i ns y s t e m ( 0 1 A )

* E 1 _ 0 1 . b i nCO P Y I NG E NG I N E

# V E R S I O N U P G R A D E

* E 1 _ 0 1 . b i ne n g i n e ( 1 . 0 1 )

* E 1 _ 0 1 . b i nCO P Y F I N I S H E D

* E 1 _ 0 1 . b i nOK?



1-11



6 Pull out the maintenance person CF card from the controller CF card slot.


1.5.3 Other Version Upgrade Operations

If addition to the utilization of version upgrade and maintenance CF cards, it is possible to

upgrade firmware versions as shown in Table 1-2 by using version upgrade DIP switches of the

device. Once DIP switches are set, procedures are the same as normal batch version upgrade

process.

* In this version upgrade, only the control firmware version, including BOOT ROM, can be upgraded.

Table 1-2 Other Version Upgrade List

DSW1 DSW2 Description

OFF OFF Upgrades all firmware versions in the device

collectively. (Normal version upgrade operation)

ON OFF Upgrades only the controller firmware version.

OFF ON Upgrades only controller firmware and BOOT ROM

versions.

ON ON Rewrites only the complete controller data, including

BOOT ROM. (Setup area is initialized.)

(Note 1) After the version-upgrade, be sure to return DIP switches 1 and 2 to OFF position.

(Note 2) Batch version up of each firmware mentioned above cannot be executed with the CF card for maintenance.

(DSW1, 2 = OFF, OFF)

<Procedures>


2 Insert the version-upgrade or maintenance CF card into the controller CF card slot.

Move DIP switches 1 and 2 to necessary positions according to the purpose (see Table

1-2.)

* Correct system file must exist in the /sys holder of each card.


The version upgrade is automatically initiated. During the process, the LCD changes

the display as shown below.



1-12

LCD displayed


5 Pull out the version upgrade CF card from the controller CF card slot.


7 Execute MENU PRINT to output the setup list and check the target firmware is

correctly version-upgraded.

L O A D I N G S Y S T E M

CO P Y I N G S Y S T E MS - E R A S I NG x x x

CO P Y I N G S Y S T E MWR I T I NG x x x

S T A R T I N G VE R - U P

CO P Y I N G S Y S T E MS Y S CO P Y S T A R T

Normal termination (DSW, 2=ON, OFF)CO P Y I NG S Y S T EMCO P Y F I N I S H E D

Normal termination (DSW, 2=OFF, ON)CO P Y I NG S Y S T EMC O P Y F I N I S H E D - B T

Normal termination (DSW, 2=ON, ON)CO P Y I NG S Y S T EMC O P Y F I N I S H E D - A L



1-13


1.5.4 Errors during CF Card Version Upgrade

If an error message appears during the CF card version upgrade take actions according to Table

1-3.

nnnn: Error code

nnnn: Error code

E C F C A R D n n n n

E T E C H C A R D n n n n



1-14

edocrorrE noitpircseddnaemanrorrE )nosrepecnanetniamrof(erusaeM

1000 sipihcyromemhsalf ehtgnisarE

.luf sseccusnu

rorreehtf I.niagaerawmrif ehtedargpunoisreV

ehtecalper,detoobtonsiecivedehtrosrucer

.draob2CRM

2000 sirotcesyromemhsalf ehtgnisarE

.luf sseccusnu



.draob2CRM

3000 .sruccotuoemitetirwyromemhsalF



.draob2CRM

4000 .sruccororreyf irevetirwyromemhsalF



.draob2CRM

0500

tonsidracFCehtniegamimetsysehT

cigaM(.ecivedehthtiwelbitapmoc

)hctamnurebmun

ehtgnisuniagaerawmrif ehtedargpunoisreV

,srucerrorreehtf I.dracFCedargpunoisrevtcerroc

.draob2CRMehtecalper

1500 tonseoddracFCehtniegamimetsysehT

.lenrek niatnoc


,srucerrorreehtf I.dracFCedargpunoisrevtcerroc


3500 sidracFCehtniegamimetsysehT

)rorreCRC(.deyortsedyllaitrap


sniatnoctahtdracFCedargpunoisrevtcerroc

ehtecalper,srucerrorreehtf I.egamimetsystcerroc

.draob2CRM

4500 tonsidracFCehtniegamimetsysehT

.ecivedehthtiwelbitapmoc




.draob2CRM

5500

tonsidracFCehtniegamimetsysehT

egamiehT(.ecivedehthtiwelbitapmoc

.egralootsiezis

ehtgnisuniagaerawmrif ehtedargpunoisreVsniatnoctahtdracFCedargpunoisrevtcerroc


.draob2CRM

6500 niatnoctonseoddracFCehtnielif ehT

)rorrenosirapmocmetsyS(.egamimetsys




.draob2CRM

0010 detanimretsissecorpedargpunoisrevehT

.yticapacyromemecivedtrohsoteud


.draob2CRMehtecalper,srucer

1010 ehtf oerawmrif edargpunoisrevehT

.ytluaf siecived

sihtf odraobehtno2WSDdna1WSDehthtiW

ro(ylevitcepsersnoitisopNOdnaFFOnitesecived

tahtdracFCehtesudna,)NO:2WSD,NO:1WSDedargpunoisrevotegamimetsystcerrocsniatnoc

.niagaerawmrif eht

,detoobtonsiecivedehtrosrucerrorreehtf I


2500 ehtotnettirwtonsiegamimetsysehT

.draob2CRMehtf oyromemhsalf

dnaNOotdraobehtno2dna1sehctiwsPIDteS

edargpunoisrevdna,ylevitcepser,snoitisopFFO

ecivedehtrosrucerrorreehtf I.niagaerawmrif eht

.draob2CRMehtecalper,detoobtonsi

metsysrellortnocniatnoctsumdracFCehT:etoN(

).)nib.metsys:emanelif (elif

Table 1-3 CF Card Version Upgrade Error List



1-15


edocrorrE noitpircseddnaemanrorrE )nosrepecnanetniamrof(erusaeM

0020 siMORTOOBf oedargpu-noisrevehT .luf sseccusnu

sihtf odraobehtno2WSDdna1WSDehthtiWro(ylevitcepsersnoitisopNOdnaFFOnitesecivedehtedargpunoisrev,)NO:2WSD,NO:1WSD

siecivedehtrosrucerrorreehtf I.niagaerawmrif .draob2CRMehtecalper,detoobton

metsysrellortnocniatnoctsumdracFCehT:etoN().)nib.metsys:emanelif (elif

0800 ehtni)tad.didrac(elif noitingocerdracehT

.tcerroctonsiegadracFC

oT.yltcerrocdracFCehtnielif tad.didracehttidE.elif ehtotgnirtsgniwollof ehtetirw,dnesiht

00.1:PSL:METSYS

1800 .sruccororredaerdracFC

dnaecnodracFCehtevomerecivedehtf f onruT-noisrevdna,enihcamehtnonrut,titresnier,srucerrorreehtf I.niagaerawmrif ehtedargpu


2800 .sruccororrenepoegamimetsysdracFC

dnaecnodracFCehtevomerecivedehtf f onruT-noisrevdna,enihcamehtnonrut,titresnier

.niagaerawmrif ehtedargpu .draob2CRMehtecalper,srucerrorreehtf I

3800 .tolsehtotnidetresnitonsidracFCehTtolsehtotnidracFCehttresniecivedehtf f onruTedargpunoisrevdna,enihcamehtnonrut,yltcerroc

.niagaerawmrif eht

4800 .detnuomyltcerroctonsidracFC

tolsehtotnidracFCehttresniecivedehtf f onruTedargpunoisrevdna,enihcamehtnonrut,yltcerroc

.niagaerawmrif eht.draob2CRMehtecalper,srucerrorreehtf I

Error code Error name and description Measure (for maintenance person)

0171 An unrecoverable error occurs on the

engine side.

Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error

recurs, replace the MEC board.

017B Version upgrade is executed using any other

file than engine firmware file.

Version upgrade the firmware again using the

correct version upgrade CF card. If the error recurs,

replace the MRC board.

017C Contents of engine flash memory cannot

be erased.



017D W r i t e t o e n g i n e f l a s h m e m o r y i s

unsuccessful.



017E Engine firmware checksum error occurs.Version upgrade the firmware again using thecorrect version upgrade CF card. If the error recurs,

replace the MRC board.

Table 1-4 CF Card Version Upgrade Error List

Table 1-5 Engine F/W Version Upgrade Error List



1-16


0009 Version up is disabled on the scanner side Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error

recurs, replace the MSC2 board.

001D Communication error occurred betweencontroller and scanner during version up.

Version upgrade the firmware again. If the errorrecurs, replace the MSC2 board.

101D Writing to the scanner flash memory failed Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error


0101 The scanner flash memory was destroyed. Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error


Table 1-6 Errors during Scanner Firmware Version Up List

Table 1-7 Errors during CF Card Version Up (for TECHCARD only) List


1001 CF card does not exist, or it is not

recognized

Insert CF card correctly.

1002 CF card type is incorrect Insert correct CF card (TECHCARD)

1003 Corresponding file is not found in CF card Insert CF card in which the system files are stored.

1004 Corresponding file in CF card is illegal. Check if the system files are destroyed, and insert

CF card that stores correct system files.

1100 Correct folder does not exist, or files are not

recognized correctly.

Store system files in correct folder, or insert CF

card already checked for correction operation.



1-17


1.5.5 Explanation of Version Upgrade CF Card

The version upgrade CF card contains the total system file where all firmware items of the device

are assembled into a single package. For this reason, it is possible to upgrade all firmware

versions collectively.

(1) Directory configuration in card

The version upgrade CF card supports two directories, each of which contains the information

file as shown below.

1 sys directory

The version upgrade total system file (system.bin) exists in the / sys directory. The size of this

system file is about 3 MB and only one system file is contained in it. If the / sys director does

not exist, the version upgrade process is not executed even when the version-upgrade CF cardis used.

2 cardid directory

The file (cardid.dat) that contains the ID code of the version upgrade card exsists in the

\cardid directory. If the ID code of the version upgrade card does not exist in the \cardid

directory, the version-upgrade card is not recognized. The ID code consists of "SYSTEM,"

"machine name," and "version."

Example: SYSTEM:LSP:1.00

Figure 1-8 Directory Configuration in CF Card Version Upgrade

1

sys

2

cardid



1-18

1.5.6 Explanation of Maintenance CF Card

The maintenance CF card is used to upgrade individually each firmware installed the device.

Multiple firmware files can be registered in the sys directory.

(1) Configuration of card directories

The maintenance CF card supports two directories, each of which contains information files or

file as shown below.

1 sys directory

The following version upgrade system files exists in the sys directory.

Total system file: system.bin

RIP controller firmware: Pxxxxx.bin (xxxxxx: version)Engine firmware: Exxxxx.bin (xxxxxx: version)

Scanner firmware: Sxxxxx.bin (xxxxxx: version) (for MF model)

If the /sys directory does not exist, the version upgrade process is not executed even when

the maintenance CF card is used.

2 cardid directory

The file (cardid.dat) that contains the ID code of the maintenance card exsists in the /cardid

directory.

If the ID code of the maintenance card does not exist in the /cardid directory, the maintenancecard is not recognized. The ID code consists of "TECH," "machine name," and "version."

(Here, "version" shows that of the total system file.)

Example: TECH:LSP:1.00

Figure 1-9 Directory Configuration of Maintenance CF Card

2

cardid

1

sys



1-19


1.5.7 Creation Method of Maintenance CF Card in Service Center

Version upgrade and maintenance CF cards respectively contain information directories that

maintain IDs, firmware versions, and system images. The file that contains these information

directories in the compressed form is provided to individual service centers so that CF cards can

be created in each office. (To execute the online version-upgrade, use the system.bin file on the

sys directory.)

(1) How to create the version-upgrade CF card

<Procedures>

1 Prepare a CF card writer. (Commercially available product is acceptable.)

2 Prepare the card formatted in FAT16 or FAT32. (FAT16 is recommended. Formatted

cards are commercially available.)

3 Prepare and extract the data compressed file discussed above. Directories and files are

loaded to the PC. (See Figure 1-10.)

4 Using the card writer, copy /sys and /cardid directories to the CF card. If the fresh CF

card is used, it is not necessary to format it with the PC.

- Cardid and sys directories must always be copied to the CF card.

Figure 1-10 Extract File Configuration



1-20

1.5.8 Version Upgrade by Web Browser

Besides the system version upgrade by the CF card, this device enables the online version

upgrade by the Web browser from the host computer.

As the firmware for version upgrade, extract the compressed file for creating the CF card and use

the "system.bin" file saved in the "sys" directory.

The following gives a procedure for the batch version upgrade using the "system.bin" file.

<Procedures>

1 Prepare the system file for the network controller firmware. (Example: system.bin)

2 Using the "remote-control startup procedures" described in the User's guide allows the

browser to display the plotter's Web screen.

3 Click "Maintenance" in the left menu list to open the Maintenance window.



1-21


4 On the left menu list, enter the following maintenance password into the Password box

and click [Login].

CSCCSUDR (8 half-size characters)

5 Clicking Special Maintenance, the third menu on the Maintenance window, will open

the Special Maintenance window. There is no task on this window. Click Next.

6 Use the View button at the center of the System Change window to select the prepared

RIP system. Click Send to Printer. It takes several seconds until the next screen

appears after the data transfer is started. The initiation of data transfer is indicated on

the operation panel of the device.

7 Check the system version on the System Change window and, if it is OK, click

System Change. (The run time is about 3 to 4 minutes.)

8 When the next screen appears, the version upgrade procedures through the browser are

completed. Upon completion of version upgrade procedures, the device is rebooted

automatically.

Note: If the plotter is turned off during the system firmware version-upgrade

process, contents of the flash memory are broken and resultantly the device

cannot be booted correctly. If this is your case, it is necessary to write the

system firmware from the CF card to the flash memory and upgrade system

firmware versions from the host computer again. Pay special attention when

the machine is away from the computer.

Note: Use the Netscape Communicator 4.5 or later or Internet Explorer 4.5 or

later.

(1) Error

Following errors may be displayed on the host computer.

The downloaded file did not pass the header check.

Cause: An error occurred during the download.

Type of error: File format error

The plotter acknowledged NG against the version-upgrade request.

Cause: An error occurred during the download.

Type of error: The version upgrade rejection error

An error occurred during the CRC check.

Cause: The system file is damaged.

Corrective action: Download the system file again and retry the CRC check. When the error

recurs, consult the supplier.



1-22

1.5.9 Version Upgrade by FTP Protocol

Besides the system version upgrade by the CF card, this device enables the online version

upgrade by the FTP protocol from the host computer.

As the firmware for version upgrade, extract the compressed file for creating the CF card and use

the "system.bin" file saved in the "sys" directory.The following gives a procedure for the batch version upgrade the "system.bin" file.

<Procedures>

1 Prepare the system file for the network controller firmware. (Example: system.bin)

2 Enter the plotter IP address to log in the device.

3 Enter the user name. Furthermore, enter the password "downloading."

4 Use the "put" command to send the system file of the network controller firmware to

the plotter.

* Example of operation on Personal computer.

> ftp <lp-1010 lp address> Enter the plotter IP address. (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

Name: downloading User name prepared for downloading the system

(down loading)

Password: downloading Enter the same string as the user name

(i.e. "downloading").

ftp>bin Change the binary mode.

ftp>put <System f ile F/W f ile name> Enter the system file name (system.bin).

ftp>quit Completed ftp protocol.

>

5 Upon completion of version-upgrade, use the "quit" command to quit the "ftp"

command. This device is automatically rebooted.

(1) Error

Following errors may be displayed on the host computer.

When the plotter is occupied by other user, the following error message appears.

421 Service not available, closing control connection (XXXX).

XXXX: 0001 -- Either netd, centroD, or testD is working.

0002 -- The device is not in idle state (i.e. the plotter is under operation.)

When the version-upgrade process is failed, the following error message appears.

553 Requested action not taken (XXXX).

XXXX: 001 -- The file is not normally formatted.

002 -- CRC check error (before writing to the flash memory)

003 -- CRC check error (after writing to the flash memory)

004 -- Flash write error

005 -- The file is transferred in the ASCII mode.

**** -- Either error code listed on pages 1-13 and 1-14 is displayed.



1-23


R e m o t e C o p y

R e m o t e C o p yS - E R A S I N G X X X

R e m o t e C o p yWR I T I NG X X X

R e m o t e C o p yCO P Y F I N I S H E D

R e m o t e C o p yS Y S CO P Y S T A R T

Press the Power key for several seconds to

turn it off.

Note: The display shown in the

left figure lasts (for about oneminute) when upgrading the

engine firmware (and the scanner

firmware for MF model).

Note: If the device is turned off during the system version-upgrade, the contents of

the flash memory are damaged to prevent the machine from correct bootup.

If this is your case, it is necessary to write the system program in the IC card

and resend the upgraded version from the host computer to the device.

(2) LCD display on the device side during online version-upgrade

The following appears on the LCD of the device during the online version upgrade through the

Web browser or FTP protocol.



2-1

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode


The engine maintenance mode is used in the periodic inspection or troubleshooting.

Chapter 2 describes the engine maintenance mode function and operation.



2-2

2.1 Overview of Engine Maintenance Mode Function and Operation

To troubleshoot the device, it is necessary to enter the engine maintenance mode. The engine

maintenance mode should be operated using the keys on the control panel while checkingscreens displayed on the LCD. In the engine maintenance mode, only six keys, [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ],

[ENTER], and [CANCEL], are used. Other keys are not used.

2.1.1 Entering the Engine Maintenance Mode

To enter the engine maintenance mode, use the following procedures:

1 Turn on the device while holding down [ ] and[ ] keys on the operation panel. The screen

appears on the LCD as shown below.

On the second line, engine firmware version and engine firmware creation date (year/

month/day) are displayed.

2 When the following message appears after several seconds,

Press [ ] and [ ] keys in order and then press the [ENTER] key.

Hint: No matter whether keys are pressed in correct or incorrect order, the buzzer

will sound.

3 After correct keys are pressed, the screen changes as follows.

Hint: When necessary keys are not pressed or keys are pressed in incorrect

order, the ENGINE MAINTENANCE MODE screen will not appear. In this

case, turn off the device once and retry the procedures from Step (1).

4 After several seconds, the "MAINTENANCE CODE 01" screen appears as shown below.

Engine firmware version Engine firmware creation date (year/month/day)

E NG I N E F / W( 1 . 1 0 ) 2 0 0 4 - 0 8 - 2 0

I N P U T P A S SWO R D

E N G I N EM A I N T E N A N C E MO D E

< 0 1 > OD OM E T E R



2-3


2.1.2 Engine Maintenance Mode by Control Panel

In the engine maintenance mode, toggle and select the desired numerical value or string, which is

sandwiched by angle brackets on the LCD, with keys on the control panel.

The device supports "select" and "set" modes for the display. When the numerical value is

marked by an underscore, the "set" mode is active.

(1) "Select" and "select and enter"

Selection refers to the operation where the angle-bracketed numerical value or string is changed

to/from another one with the [ ] or [ ] key. "Select and enter" refers to the operation where the

[ENTER] key is pressed to confirm the selection.

(2) "Set" and "set and enter"

Setup refers to the operation where the digit marked by the underscore in the angle brackets is

increased or decreased with the [ ] or [ ] key or the underscore is moved with the [ ] or [ ]

key. "Set and enter" refers to the operation where the [ENTER] key is pressed to confirm the

setting.

(3) Maintenance code and subcode

First, select and enter a maintenance code. Then, select or set a subcode.

1 Select the angle-bracketed maintenance code, mm using [ ] or [ ] keys.

"Maintenance code, mm, display."

2 After the [ENTER] key is pressed to select- enter the code, the angle-bracketed subcode, ss,

appears next to it. In this condition, check the contents and perform the maintenance.

"Maintenance code, mm, subcode, ss, display."

3 After the subcode is select and enter or set and enter, the maintenance code and subcode are

connected with a hyphen (-). In this condition, select the desired parameter and perform the

maintenance.

mm < 7 0 2 >

< mm >

mm < s s >

mm - s s



2-4

2.2 Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu

Table 2-1 shown below lists valid maintenance codes and maintenance and diagnostic menu

selections.

Table 2-1 Valid Maintenance Codes and Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu List

Maintenancecode

Display Function Refer

item

01 <01> ODOMETER Displays the total print distance. 2.3.1

02 <02> LIFE

Displays the print distance counted until the

replacement of a part, as well as allowable

next print distance.

Clears the print distance counted until the

replacement of a part.

2.3.2

03 <03> CLEANING

Displays the print distance counted until the

cleaning of a part, as well as allowable next

print distance.

Clears the print distance counted until the

cleaning of parts.

2.3.3

04 <04> ERROR LOG Displays the unrecoverable error

information. 2.3.4

05 <05> JAM LOG Displays the paper jam error information. 2.3.5

06 <06> SENSOR

Displays the status of sensors and switches.

Controls the buzzer sound so that you can

identify the change in status.

2.3.6

07 <07> THERMISTOR Dis plays the s tatus of ther mis tor s andhalogen lamp. 2.3.7

08 <08> ACTUATOR

Displays the status of motors, clutches, and

fans.

Runs these devices independently.

2.3.8

09 <09> TEST

Executes complex operations to adjust the

voltage and current of the high-voltage

power unit, and prints the paper to adjust the

nip pressure.

2.3.9

10 <10> PRINT Selects any of 18 test patterns supported by

the engine and prints the selected pattern. 2.3.10

11 <11> REGULATE

Executes the adjustment printout required as

a r e s u l t o f c h a n g e i n e n g i n e c o n t r o l

parameters such as front edge and side

registrations.

2.3.11

12 <12> PARAMETER Changes the engine control parameters in

RAM value. 2.3.12

13 <13> NVRAM

Saves the engine control parameters RAM

value to NVRAM.

Initializes NVRAM.

2.3.13

14 <14> USER PARAMETER Changes the RAM value of user-defined

parameters. 2.3.14

15 <15> ROLL WIDTH Changes the print width of the paper roll. 2.3.15

16 <16> PROCESS LOG Displays the process cartridge information. 2.3.16



2-5


2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter Operation the Maintenance Code

Display maintenance code 01 according to the procedures described in Section 2.1.1 "Entering

the Engine Maintenance Mode." Select the maintenance code using [ ] or [ ] key, and press

the [ENTER] key to select and enter the code.

"MAINTENANCE CODE

01 DISPLAY"

(To Section 2.3.1)< 0 1 > OD OM E T E R

< 0 2 > L I F E

< 1 5 > RO L L W I D T H

< 1 6 > P RO C E S S L OG

"MAINTENANCE CODE

02 DISPLAY"

(To Section 2.3.2)

"MAINTENANCE CODE

15 DISPLAY"

(To Section 2.3.15)

"MAINTENANCE CODE

16 DISPLAY"

(To Section 2.3.16)

When the [CANCEL] key is pressed during the selection of maintenance code, you can return to

the MAINTENANCE CODE 01 screen without using the [ ] or [ ] key.

When the [ ] key is pressed during the selection of maintenance code, the engine firmware

version described in Section 2.3.1 1 is displayed. After 10 seconds or when you press any key,

the maintenance code selection window reappears.

When the [ ] key is pressed during the selection of maintenance code, the engine board version

is displayed. After 10 seconds or when you press any key, the maintenance code selection

window reappears.



2-6

2.3 Operation Method of Maintenance and Diagnostic Menus

Maintenance and diagnostic menus classified with maintenance codes are furthermore divided

into detailed subcoded categories. This section describes various operations based onmaintenance codes and subcodes.

2.3.1 Maintenance Code 01 "ODOMETER" (Total Print Distance)

(1) Function

This code displays the total print distance (in meter) and total print count.

Maintenancecode

Subcode Display Function

01

01 01<01> Total

12345 m Displays the total print distance.

02 01<02> Roll-1

10000 m Displays the total print distance of roll 1.

03 01<03> Roll-2


04 01<04> Roll-3


05 01<05> Sheet

45 m Displays the total print distance of manual feed.

06

01<06> Total Count

5678 Displays the total print count.

Whenever one drawing is normally plotted, the total print distance and print count are increased.

If an error such as paper jam occurs or the process is terminated during the printout of drawing,

the total distance and count are not increased since the drawing is incomplete.

For about 400-mm long blank space that is fed while "DOOR OPEN CUT" or "TOP EDGE CUT

TIMER" is being enabled, the total print distance is increased but the total print count maintains

the current value.



2-7


In the total print count, the increment is 1 for manual feeding. For the paper roll, the increment is

determined by the length and width of the roll necessary to print one drawing, as shown in the

table below.

A3 (297 mm×420 mm), 11 inch×17 inch, 12 inch×18 inch: 1 count-up

A1 (594 mm×841 mm), 22 inch×34 inch, 24 inch×36 inch: 3 count-up

Length Count-up value

Up to (mm) Up to (lines)

A3 width equivalent paperroll

594 mm,610 mm,620 mm,

700 mm,707 mm,

22 inch, 24 inch

A1 width equivalent paperroll

594 mm,610 mm,620 mm,

700 mm,707 mm,

22 inch, 24 inch

460 10867 1 2

920 21733 2 3

1380 32599 3 4

1840 43465 4 6

2300 54332 5 8

2760 65198 6 9

3220 76064 7 10

3680 86930 8 12

4140 97797 9 13

4600 108663 10 15

5060 119529 11 18

5520 130395 13 19

5980 141261 14 21

6440 152128 15 22

6900 162994 16 24

7360 173860 17 25

7820 184726 18 27

8280 195593 19 28

8740 206459 20 30

9200 217325 21 31

9660 228191 22 33

10120 239058 24 36



2-8

A2 (420 mm×594 mm), 17 inch×22 inch), 18 inch×24 inch: 2 count-up

A0 (841 mm×1189 mm), 34 inch×44 inch), 36 inch×48 inch: 5 count-up

Length Count-up value

Up to (mm) Up to (lines)

A2-size-in-widthequivalent paper roll

420 mm,440 mm,

450 mm,500 mm,

17 inch, 18 inch

A0-size-in-width equivalentpaper roll841 mm,

880 mm,900 mm,

910 mm,914 mm,30 inch,

34 inch, 36 inch

320 7560 1 2

640 15119 2 3

960 22678 3 4

1280 30237 4 5

1600 37796 5 6

1920 45355 6 8

2240 52914 7 9

2560 60473 8 10

2880 68033 9 11

3200 75592 10 13

3520 83151 11 14

3840 90710 12 15

4160 98269 14 17

4480 105828 15 19

4800 113387 16 20

5120 120946 17 21

5440 128505 18 23

5760 136065 19 24

6080 143624 20 25

6400 151183 21 26

6720 158742 22 27

7040 166301 23 29

7360 173860 24 30

7680 181419 25 31

8000 188978 26 33

8320 196537 28 34

8640 204097 29 35

8960 211656 30 37

9280 219215 31 39

9600 226774 32 40

9920 234333 33 41

10240 241892 34 43



2-9


(2) Operation for displaying the total print distance

1 If maintenance code 01 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and

Enter the Maintenance Code," the total print distance of the maintenance code 01, subcode

01 is displayed initially.

2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display each content sequentially for checking.

3 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 01" display comes back.

"MAINTENANCE CODE 01 DISPLAY"

0 1 < 0 1 > T o t a l1 2 3 4 5 m

0 1 < 0 2 > R o l l - 11 0 0 0 0 m

0 1 < 0 3 > R o l l - 22 0 0 0 m

0 1 < 0 4 > Ro l l - 33 0 0 m

01< 0 5 > S h e e t4 5 m

0 1 < 0 6 > T o t a l C o u n t1 2 3 4 5

< 0 1 > OD OM E T E R



2-10

2.3.2 Maintenance Code 02 "LIFE" (part replacement information)

(1) Function

As the part replacement information, the print distance after part replacement and the

replacement criteria are displayed.

Also, the print distance after part replacement can be cleared to "0" by selecting and entering a

subcode. However, for spare parts, the print distance cannot be cleared to "0."

Note: The print distance must be cleared when a part was replaced.

ecnanetniaMedoc

edocbuS yalpsiD emantraptnemecalpeR ecalpeR

airetirc

20

10 40,20,10HT>10<20

mk 001 / m54321

rotsimrehT mk 001

20 eriWCT>20<20

mk 02 / m54321 )2(eriwegrahC mk 02

30 eriWCD>30<20

mk 02 / m54321 )3(eriwegrahC mk 02

40 retliFenozO>40<20

mk 05 / m54321 retlif enozO mk 05

50 lloRtaeH>50<20

mk 001 / m54321 yssA)resuF(regniF mk 001

60 lloRerusserP>60<20

mk 001 / m54321 )taeH(relloR mk 001

70 edalB.gaM>70<20

mk 001 / m54321 )puk caB(relloR mk 001

80 ->80<20

mk 001 / m54321 yssA)VD(edalB mk 001

90 ->90<20

mk 0 / m54321 erapS airetircoN

01 ->01<20


11 ->11<20


21 ->21<20


31 ->31<20


41 ->41<20 mk 0 / m54321 erapS airetircoN

51 ->51<20


Print distance after part replacement Part replacement criterion

0 2 < 0 1 > TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 41 2 3 4 5 m / 1 0 0 K m

Part name



2-11


(2) Operation for displaying part replacement information


Enter the Maintenance Code," the part replacement information of maintenance code 02,

subcode 01 is displayed initially.


3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, "maintenance code 02" display comes back.

4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the print distance after the part replacement can be cleared as

shown on the next page.


(To next page)

( key is inactive

for spare parts)

0 2 < 0 1 > TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 41 2 3 4 5 m / 1 0 0 K m

0 2 < 0 2 > T C W i r e

1 2 3 4 5 m / 2 0 K m

0 2 < 1 4 > -1 2 3 4 5 m / 0 K m

0 2 < 1 5 > -1 2 3 4 5 m / 0 K m

( key is inactive

for spare parts)

< 0 2 > L I F E



2-12

Print distance after replacement becomes "0."

(3) Operation for clearing part replacement information

The following describes the operation for clearing the print distance to be operated after a part

was replaced, taking an example of subcode 01.

1 Following the message shown on the previous page, a clear confirmation message is

displayed if the replaced part is selected and entered.

2 If the [ENTER] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the print distance after part

replacement is cleared to "0."

3 The "maintenance code 02, subcode 01" display comes back, and the print distance "0" after

part replacement is displayed.

4 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the "maintenance code 02,

subcode 01" display comes back without clearing the print distance.

0 2 < 0 1 > TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4( C l e a r O K ? )

0 2 < 0 1 > T H 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 40 m / 1 0 0 K m

(Return to previous page)

(Continued from previous page)

0 2 < 0 1 > T H 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 41 2 3 4 5 m / 1 0 0 K m

"MAINTENANCE CODE 02, SUBCODE

01 DISPLAY"



2-13


2.3.3 Maintenance Code 03 "CLEANING" (part cleaning information)

(1) Function

As the part cleaning information, the print distance after part cleaning and the cleaning criteria

are displayed.Also, the print distance after part cleaning can be cleared to "0" by selecting a subcode. However,

for spare parts, the print distance cannot be cleared to "0."

Note: The print distance must be cleared when a part was cleaned.

Maintenancecode

Subcode Display Location or part name to be

cleanedCleaningcriteria

03

01 03<01> TH01, 02, 04

12345 m/ 5 km Thermistor 5 km

02 03<02> TC Wire

12345 m/ 5 km Change wire (2) 5 km

03 03<03> DC Wire

12345 m/ 5 km Change wire (3) 5 km

04 03<04> SLA

12345 m/ 5 km SLA 5 km

05 03<05> Tracking Roll

12345 m/ 5 km Roller (1) 5 km

06 03<06> Heat Roll

12345 m/ 5 km Roller (Heat) 5 km

07 03<07> Pressure Roll

12345 m/ 5 km Roller (Backup) 5 km

08 03<08> Regist Roll

12345 m/ 10 km Roller (Height) 10 km

09 03<09> Cutter Roll12345 m/ 10 km

Roller (Cutway) 10 km

10 03<10> PF. Roll

12345 m/ 10 km Roller (Paper feed 1, 2) 10 km

11 03<11> Spacer DV

12345 m/ 5 km Spacer (CV) 5 km

12 03<12> Fuser Finger

12345 m/ 10 km Finger (Fuser) ASSY 10 km

13 03<13> -

12345 m/ 0 km Spare No criterion

14 03<14> -


15

03<15> -


16 03<16> -


17 03<17> -


18 03<18> -


19 03<19> -


Print distance after part cleaning Part cleaning criterion

0 3 < 0 2 > T C W i r e1 2 3 4 5 m / 5 K m

Part name



2-14

(2) Operation for displaying part replacement information


Enter a Maintenance Code," the part replacement information of the maintenance code 03,



3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 03" display comes back.

4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the print distance after the part replacement can be cleared as

shown on the next page.


(To next page)

( key is inactive

for spare parts)

0 3 < 0 1 > T H 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 41 2 3 4 5 m / 5 K m

0 3 < 0 2 > T C W i r e1 2 3 4 5 m / 5 K m

0 3 < 1 8 > -1 2 3 4 5 m / 0 K m

0 3 < 1 9 > -1 2 3 4 5 m / 0 K m

( key is inactive

for spare parts)

< 0 3 > C L E A N I N G



2-15


(3) Operation for clearing part cleaning information

The following describes the operation for clearing the print distance to be operated after a part

was cleaned, taking an example of subcode 02.

1 Following the message shown on the previous page, a clear confirmation message is

displayed if the cleaned part is selected and entered.

2 If the [ENTER] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the print distance after part

cleaning is cleared to "0." The "maintenance code 03, subcode 02" display comes back, and

the print distance "0" after part cleaning is displayed.

3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the "maintenance code 03,

subcode 02" display comes back without clearing the print distance.

Print distance after part cleaning becomes "0."

0 3 - 0 2 T C W i r e( C l e a r O K ? )

0 3 < 0 2 > T C W i r e0 m / 5 Km

(Return to previous page)(Continue of previous page)

0 3 < 0 2 > T C W i r e1 2 3 4 5 m / 5 Km

"MAINTENANCE CODE 03 SUB CODE 02DISPLAY"



2-16

Maintenancecode


01

01 04<01> [2032] R1N A2

03-06 (09:30) 12340 m

Displays the information on the latest unrecoverable

error.

02 Displays the information on the second latest

unrecoverable error.

: : :

10 04<10> [ ]

Displays the information on the tenth latest

unrecoverable error. (If there is no error log, the

error code is left blank.)

Date of error occurrence

Month/day/hour/minute(March 6, 9H30M)

0 4 < 0 1 > [ 2 0 3 2 ] R 1 N A 20 3 - 0 6 ( 0 9 : 3 0 ) 1 2 3 4 0 m

Information on paper used when error

occurred (Roll 1, normal paper, width

equivalent to A2)

Error code

Total print distance

when erroroccurred

2.3.4 Maintenance Code 04 "ERROR LOG" (Unrecoverable Error Log)

(1) Function

This code displays up to ten latest unrecoverable errors.

An error code, information on paper used when an error occurred, date of error occurrence, and

total print distance when an error occurred are displayed as follows:



2-17


Meaning of six-character "paper information"

1st and 2nd characters(Paper supply source)

Meaning

R1 Roll 1

R2 Roll 2

SH Manual feed

Paper supply source is not identified.

sretcarahcht4dnadr3)repapfoepyT(

gninaeM

N epaplamroN

1T )1edomrepapgnicart(repapgnicarT

2T )2edomrepapgnicart(repapgnicarT

F mliF

.deif itneditonsiepytrepaP

5th and 6th characters(paper width)

Meaning

A0

A0 width equivalent roll paper (841 mm)

Roll paper having the following width:

36 inch, 34 inch, 30 inch, 914 mm,

910 mm, 900 mm, and 880 mm

A1


Roll paper having the following width:24 inch, 22 inch, 707 mm, 770 mm,

620 mm, and 610 mm

A2



18 inch, 17 inch, 500 mm, 450 mm, and

440 mm

A3



12 inch, 11 inch, 310 mm

Paper supply source is not identified.



2-18


(2) Operation for displaying unrecoverable error log


Enter a Maintenance Code," the unrecoverable error log of the maintenance code 04,



3 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 04" display comes back.

0 4 < 0 1 > [ 2 0 3 2 ] R 1 N A 20 3 - 0 6 ( 0 9 : 3 0 ) 1 2 3 4 0 m

0 4 < 0 2 > [ 2 0 3 2 ] R 1 N A 30 3 - 0 5 ( 1 8 : 3 2 ) 1 2 3 0 0 m

0 4 < 0 9 > [ ]

0 4 < 1 0 > [ ]

< 0 4 > E R R O R L O G



2-19


(3) Unrecoverable error codes and description

Table 2-2 Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes

Unrecoverable

error codes Description

2020 BM01 (waster toner bottle vibrating motor) trouble

2021, 2022 HM01 (heat roller pulse motor) trouble

2023 PM01 (process motor) trouble

2024, 202A CM01 (developer pulse motor) trouble

2026, 202B TM01 (paper feed pulse motor) trouble

2027, 202C FM01 (paper feed pulse motor 1) trouble

2028, 202D FM02 (paper feed pulse motor 2) trouble

2029, 202E FM03 (paper feed pulse motor 3) trouble

2030 Power supply failure (50Hz/60Hz evaluation value is abnormal)

2032 High voltage power supply failure (overload occurred in high voltage output)

2033 Power supply failure (interrupt does not occur when the power turns off)

2035 LED head correction data transfer error (time out)

2036 LED head correction data transfer error (header error)

2037 LED head correction data transfer error (footer error)

2081 TH02 (over thermistor) detected overheat of fuser temperature

2082 TH01 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure

Extremely high temperature (cables could be shorted)

2083 TH01 (fixation temperature control thermistor) exceeded the fixation upper limit temp

2084 After warm-up started, fixation temperature TH01 did not reach specified temp within specified time

2085 TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be shorted) or

extremely low temp (cables could be disconnected)

2086 TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) exceeded the LED head upper limit temp

2087 TH04 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be shorted)

2088 TH04 (fixation temperature control thermistor) exceeded the fixation upper limit temp

2089 After warm-up started, fixation temperature TH04 did not reach specified temp within specified time

20C1-20C3 NVRAM checksum error (system parameter)

20C4 NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part replacement)

20C5 NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part cleaning)

20C6 NVRAM checksum error (user-defined engine parameter)

20C8 NVRAM checksum error (unrecoverable error log)

20C9 NVRAM checksum error (paper jam error log)

20CA NVRAM checksum error (process cartridge consumption log)20D1-20D8 NVRAM checksum error (engine control parameter)

20E0 WDT (watchdog timer) overflow

2D01 NAK was transmitted to the controller 7 times but no command is returned

2D02 Response to the controller was made 7 times but ACK is not returned

2D03 In receiving data from controller, the line error was detected more than 100 times

2D04 Engine status transition was noticed to the controller 7 times but ACK is not returned

2F7C After F/W rewriting error occurred, the flash memory cannot be cleared (F/W cannot be restored)

2F7D After F/W rewriting error occurred, no data can be written to the flash memory (F/W cannot be restored)

2F7E After F/W rewriting error occurred, checksum of F/W rewritten to the flash memory does not match (F/W cannot

be restored)

2F7F After F/W rewriting error occurred, F/W rewritten to the flash memory does not match the contents of SRAM (F/Wcannot be restored)



2-20

0 5 < 0 1 > [ 3 7 0 2 ] R 1 N A 30 3 - 0 7 ( 1 0 : 5 8 ) 1 2 3 4 5 m

Date of error occurrence

Month day hour minute(March 7, 10H58M)

Total print distance when error

occurred

Information on paper used when error

occurred (Roll 1, normal paper, width

equivalent to A3)

Error code

2.3.5 Maintenance Code 05 "JAM LOG" (Paper Jam Error Log)

This code displays up to ten latest paper jam errors.

An error code, information on paper used when an error occurred, date of error occurrence, and

total print distance when an error occurred are displayed as follows:

Maintenancecode

Subcode Display Feature

05

01 05<01> [3702] R1N A3

03-07 (10:58) 12345 m Displays the information on the latest paper jam error.

02 05<01> [3702] R1N A3

03-05 (18:25) 12300 m

Displays the information on the second latest paper jam

error.

: : :

10 05<10> [ ]

Displays the information on the tenth latest paper jam

error. (If there is no error log, the error code is left

blank.)

The meaning of the six-character "paper information" is the same as that explained in Section

2.3.4 "MAINTENANCE CODE 04 "ERROR LOG" (Unrecoverable Error Log)."



2-21


(2) Operation for displaying paper jam error log


Enter a Maintenance Code," the latest paper jam error information of the maintenance

code 05, subcode 01 is displayed initially.




0 5 < 0 1 > [ 3 7 0 2 ] R 1 N A 30 3 - 0 7 ( 1 0 : 5 8 ) 1 2 3 4 5 m

0 5 < 0 2 > [ 3 7 0 1 ] R 1 N A 30 3 - 0 5 ( 1 8 : 2 5 ) 1 2 3 0 0 m

0 5 < 0 9 > [ 3 6 0 1 ] R 2 T 1 A 10 2 -1 8 ( 1 5 : 0 3 ) 1 2 0 0 0 m

0 5 < 1 0 > [ ]

< 0 5 > J A M L O G



2-22

(3) Paper jam error codes and description

Table 2-3 Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes

Paper jamerror codes

Description

Doors to open for removing the paper

Roll 1, Roll 2, or Roll 3paper feed

Manual paper feed

3330 Paper is located at PS30 (under cutter) position

Door 5 and then Door 13331 Paper is located at PS31 (under cutter) position



3401, 3402 Arrival of paper top edge at PS04 is too early

Door 13403, 3404 Paper top edge does not arrive at PS04

3491, 3492 When paper roll is rewound, arrival at PS04 is too

early

3493, 3494 When paper roll is rewound, paper exists in PS04

after preset paper pass time elapsed Door 5 and then Door1

3500 Paper is located in PS04 (register) position Door 6

3501, 3502 Arrival of paper top edge at PS05 is too early Door 5(Door 5 and) Door 9, Door 4

3503, 3504 Paper top edge does not arrive at PS05 Door 5 and then Door1

3591, 3592 Paper trail edge leaves PS05 too early

Door 63593, 3594

Paper trail edge does not leave PS05 after preset

paper pass time elapsed

3600 Paper is located in PS04 (suction) position Door 6

Door6

Door 6 (Door 5 and) Door 9,

Door 4

3601, 3602 Arrival of paper top edge at PS06 is too earlDoor 6

Door6




Door 63693, 3694



3700 Paper is located in PS07 (fuser) position Door 6

Door6


Door 4

3701, 3702 Arrival of paper top edge at PS07 is too earlyDoor 6

Door6




Door 63793, 3794



3042-3047 Trouble when cutter blade moves Door 5

Door1: Roll 1 (top) drawer PS21

Door2: Roll 2 (middle) drawer PS22

Door4: Manual feed drawer CNCT

Door5: Cutter door INT3

Door6: Top cover MS08, INT1

Door7: Fixation door MS06

Door8: Manual paper feeding holder MS07

Door9: Cutter door inside (No open-close detection senor)

Door10: Cutter door lower small door (No open-close detection senor)

Door 1 means either Door 1 or Door 2.

To open the Door 7, the Door 8 must be opened first.

To open the Door 9, the Door 5 must be opened first.



2-23


2.3.6 Maintenance Code 06 "SENSOR" (Sensor)

(1) Function

This code displays the status of sensors and switches.

Maintenancecode

Subcode Display Function Status

06

00 06<00> Beep OFF Enables or disables the buzzer used to

identify the status of relevant devices.

ON: Buzzer works.

OFF: Buzzer does not work.

01 06<01> PS30

OFF

Displays the status of the paper width

judge sensor. (A0 width or more)

ON: Paper exists.

OFF: Paper does not exist.

02 06<02> PS31

OFF



03 06<03> PS32

OFF



04 06<04> PS04

OFF

Displays the status of the paper

detection sensor (cutter lower).

05 06<05> PS05

OFF


detection sensor (registration).

06 06<06> PS06OFF

Displays the status of the paperdetection sensor (suction).

07 06<07> PS07

OFF


detection sensor (fixation).

08 06<08> PS11

ON

Displays the status of the roll 1 flange

detection sensor. ON: Roll flanges exist.

OFF: Roll flange does not

exist.09 06<09> PS12

ON

Displays the status of the roll 2 flange

detection sensor.

11 06<11> PS15

OFF

Displays the status of the manual feed

paper detection sensor.

ON: Paper exists.

OFF: Paper does not exist.

12 06<12> PS21

ON

Displays the status of the roll 1 drawer

open/close detection sensor. (Door 1)

ON: Close

OFF: Open13

06<13> PS22

ON

Displays the status of the roll 2 drawer

open/close detection sensor. (Door 2)

15 06<15> MS04ON

Displays the status of the toner dooropen/close switch.

16 06<16> MS05

ON

Displays the status of the waste toner

bottle detection switch.

ON: Bottle exists.

OFF: Bottle does not exist.

17 06<17> MS06

ON

Displays the status of the fixation door

open/close switch. (Door 7)

ON: Close

OFF: Open

18 06<18> MS07

ON

Displays the status of the manual feed

holder open/close switch.

19 06<19> MS08

ON

Displays the status of the upper door

(left side) open/close switch. (Door 6)

20 06<20> INT1

ON

Displays the status of the upper door

open/close interlock switch. (Door 6)

21 06<21> INT3

ON

Displays the status of the cutter door

open/close interlock switch. (Door 5)

22 06<22> CNCT

ON

Displays the status of the manual feeddrawer open/close connector. (Door

4)

23 06<23> RE01

OFF

Displays the status of the cutter blade

detection (right edge) micro switch. ON: Cutter blade exists.

OFF: Cutter blade does not

exist.24 06<24> RE02

ON

Displays the status of the cutter blade

detection (left edge) micro switch.

25 06<25> TS01

ON Displays the status of the toner sensor.

ON: Toner exists.

OFF: Toner does not exist.26

06<26> TS02

OFF


sensor



2-24

(2) Operation for displaying the sensor status


Enter the Maintenance Code," the buzzer set of the maintenance code 06, subcode 00 is

displayed initially.

2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display the status of each sensor.


4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed during the setup of buzzer (subcode 00), you can enable or

disable the buzzer whose tone is changed according to the status of sensors and switches, as

described on the next page.


To next page0 6 < 0 0 > B e e p O F F

0 6 < 0 1 > P S 3 0 O N

0 6 < 2 5 > T S 0 1O N

0 6 < 2 6 > T S 0 2O F F

< 0 6 > S E N S O R



2-25


0 6 - 0 0 B e e p O F F< O N >

0 6 < 0 0 > B e e p O N

Setting changes from OFF to ON.

(3) Operation for buzzer enable/disable setting

On the maintenance code 06, subcode 00 screen, you can enable or disable the buzzer whose tone

is changed according to the status of sensors and switches.

1 When subcode 00 is selected and entered, the parameter that shows the setting opposite to the

current valid setting is displayed.

2 Press [ENTER] key. The buzzer setting will change from ON to OFF and vice versa.

3 Press [CANCEL] key. The current setting is maintained.

0 6 < 0 0 > B e e p O F F

"MAINE. CODE 06 SUBCODE 00 DISPLAY"



Hint: After ON is selected, the buzzer sounds in different tone depending on the

status of the sensors or switches selected from SUBCODE 01 through 26.

When the sensor is turned on, the long beep sound is generated. When the

sensor is turned off, the short beep sound is generated.

When the maintenance code 06 “SENSOR” display is closed, this “06”

mode is quitted.



2-26

2.3.7 Maintenance Code 07 "THERMISTOR" (Thermistor)

(1) Function

This code displays the status of thermistors and halogen lamp.

Hint: In Subcode 01, 03, and 04, an asterisk (*) shows the status of two halogen

lamps of the fixation device.

While the halogen lamp to heat the central area is being turned on, the

status is indicated with the 10th character. While the halogen lamp to heat

both side areas is being turned on, the status is indicated with the 6th

character.

Maintenancecode

Subcode Display Function Status

07

01 07<01> TH01* 123 ˚ C

TH01: Displays thetemperature at the center of

the fixation.

-

02 07<02> TH02

NORMAL

TH02: Displays whether the

overheated fixation is

detected.

OVERHEAT:

Overheat is detected.

NORMAL:

Overheat is not detected.

03 07<03> TH02

* * 32 C

TH03: Displays the

temperature of the LED head. -

04 07<04> TH04

* 100 C

TH04: Displays the

temperature at the left end of

the fixation.

-

Hint: The lower display limit of temperatures of TH1 and TH4 is 45°C. If there is

any disconnection, 45°C or 51°C is displayed.



2-27



(2) Operation for checking thermistor status


Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 07, subcode 01 is displayed initially.

2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display the status of each thermistor for checking.

3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the [maintenance code 07] display comes back.

0 7 < 0 1 > T H 0 1* 1 2 3 º C

0 7 < 0 2 > T H 0 2N O R M A L

0 7 < 0 4 > T H 0 4* 1 0 0 º C

0 7 < 0 3 > T H 0 3* * 3 2 º C

< 0 7 > T H E RM I S T O R



2-28

2.3.8 Maintenance Code 08 "ACTUATOR" (Actuator)

(1) Function

This code displays the status of the system equipment such as high-voltage power unit, motor,

and clutch, and specifies their operations.

Hint: When maintenance code 08 is active, errors such as a door open error are

not detected.

Maintenancecode

Subcode Display Function Status or operation

parameter

08

00 08<00> Actuator Turns off major actuators. OFF: OFF

01 08<01> CC

OFF

Displays the status of the charge unit

(CC) and specifies its operation.

ON: ON

OFF: OFF

02 08<02> DB

OFF

Displays the status of the developer

unit (DB) and specifies its operation.

03 08<03> TC

OFF

Displays the status of the transcription

unit (TC) and specifies its operation.

04 08<04> DC

OFF

Displays the status of the separator

(DC) and specifies its operation.

05 08<05> EL

OFF

Displays the status of the dischange

(EL) and specifies its operation.

06 08<06> PM01

OFF

Displays the status of the process

motor and specifies its operation.

ON: Rotated

OFF: Stopped

07 08<07> HM01

OFF

Displays the status of the heat roller

pulse motor and specifies its operation.

ON: Rotated

OFF: Stopped

08 08<08> GM01

OFF

Displays the status of the developer

unit pulse motor and specifies its

operation.

ON1: Developing direction

CW-ON

ON2: Toner stirring direction

CW-ON

OFF: Stopped

09 08<09> BM01

OFF


bottle vibration monitor and specifies

its operation.

ON: Rotated

OFF: Stopped

10 08<10> TM01

OFF

Displays the status of the paper feed

pulse motor and specifies its operation.

ON1: Paper feed direction

CCW-ON

ON2: Rewinding direction

CW-ON

OFF: Stop

11 08<11> FM01

OFF

Displays the status of the paper feed 1

and specifies its operation. ON1: Paper feed direction

CW-ON

ON2: Rewinding direction

CCW-ON

OFF: Stop

12 08<12> FM02

OFF

Displays the status of the paper feed 2

and specifies its operation.

13 08<13> FM03OFF

Displays the status of the paper feed 3and specifies its operation.

14 08<14> CL04

OFF

Displays the status of the registration

roller clutch and specifies its

operation. ON: Engaged

OFF: Disengaged

15 08<15> CL06

OFF

Displays the status of the paper feed

roller clutch and specifies its

operation.

16 08<16> BL01

OFF

Displays the status of the suction fan

and specifies its operation. ON1: Rotated fast

ON2: Rotated slowly

OFF: Stopped17 08<17> BL02

OFF

Displays the status of the fixation

device top center fan and specifies its

operation.

18 08<18> BL03 OFF Displays the status of the charge unitfan and specifies its operation. ON: RotatedOFF: Stopped

19 08<19> BL06

OFF

Displays the status of the fixation top

b o th ed g e f an an d sp ec i f i es i t s

operation.

ON1: Rotated fast

ON2: Rotated slowly

OFF: Stopped



2-29


(2) Operation for checking the actuator status



2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display current status of each actuator for checking.


4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed to enter the selected item, the operation of the actuators can be

specified as shown in (3) or (4) on the following pages.


(To next page )

(To page 2-31)

0 8 < 0 0 > A c t u a t o r o f f

0 8 < 0 1 > C CO F F

0 8 < 1 8 > B L 0 3O F F

0 8 < 1 9 > B L 0 6O F F

(To page 2-31)

(To page 2-31)

< 0 8 > A C T U A T O R



2-30

0 8 - 0 0 A c t u a t o r o f f< O F F >

0 8 < 0 0 > A c t u a t o r o f f

Actuator OFF is

executed

(3) Operation for turning off the actuators

With the maintenance code 08, subcode 00, main actuators can be turned off.

1 If subcode 00 is selected and entered, parameter <OFF> is displayed.

2 Press the [ENTER] key to execute the actuator OFF.

3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the actuator OFF is not executed.

The actuators changed by the actuator off operation and the statuses immediately after actuator

off operation are as listed below:

0 8 < 0 0 > A c t u a t o r o f f"MAINTENANCE CODE 08, SUBCODE 00 DISPLAY"



rotautcA retfayletaidemmisutatS

yrtne"FFO"

CC regrahC

FFO:FFO

BD repoleveD

CT noitpircsnarT

CD rotarapeS

LE noitacif irtceleD

10MP rotomssecorP

deppotS:FFO

10MH rotomesluprellortaeH

10MG rotomesluptinurepoleveD

10MB rotomnoitarbivelttobrenotetsaW

10MT rotomeslupdeef repaP

10MF 1rotomeslupdeef repaP



MTUC rotomrettuC deppotS:FFO

40LC hctulcrellornoitartsigeRdegagnesiD:FFO

60LC hctulcrellordeef launaM

10LB naf noitcuS deppotS:FFO

20LB naf retnecpotnoitaxiF detatoR:NO

30LB naf tinugnigrahC deppotS:FFO

60LB naf egdehtobpotnoitaxiF detatoR:NO

10LF )trapretnec(pmalnegolahnoitaxiFf f odenruT:FFO

20LF )trapegdehtob(pmalnegolahnoitaxiF



2-31


(4) Operation for executing actuator operation

The following describes the operation for executing the actuator operation, taking an example of

subcode 01.

1 If the actuator to be operated is selected and entered, the "ON/OFF" parameter is

parenthesized.

2 If the "ON/OFF" parameter is selected and entered, the selected operation is executed. The

display returns to "maintenance code 08, subcode 01" and the "ON/OFF" status changes to

the specified one.

3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during selection of "ON/OFF" parameter, the "ON/OFF" is

not changed and the "maintenance code 08, subcode 01" display comes back.

Note: If the motor rotating direction is changed, select "OFF" once, and then

change the direction.

If "OFF" is selected for the pulse motor, it will stop after deceleration, but

during the deceleration, ON1 or ON2 is displayed.

0 8 - 0 1 C C< ON >

0 8 < 0 1 > C CO N

Setting changes from OFF to ON

0 8<01 > C CO F F

"MAINTENANCE CODE 08, SUBCODE 01DISPLAY"

(Continued from Page 2-29)(Return to Page 2-29)

Select and enter "ON/OFF"

parameter



2-32

2.3.9 Maintenance Code 09 "TEST" (Test)

(1) Function

Performs the test functions below:

ecnanetniaMedoc

edocbuS yalpsiD noitcnuF metirefeR

90

10 k cehCCC>10<90 yramirpehttsu jdaotnoitarepoehtsmrof reP

.tnerrucegrahc

)3(9.3.2

20 k cehCBD>20<90 repolevedehttsu jdaotnoitarepoehtsmrof reP

.saib

30 k cehCCT>30<90 ref snartehttsu jdaotnoitarepoehtsmrof reP

.tnerruc

40 k cehCCD>40<90 rotarapesehttsu jdaotnoitarepoehtsmrof reP

.saib

50 noH-DEL>50<90 pmalehtnonrutotnoitarepoehtsmrof reP

.daehDELehtni)4(9.3.2

60 k nilbH-DEL>60<90 nipmalehtk nilbotnoitarepoehtsmrof reP.daehDELeht

70 5PIN>70<90

2yb2(5nrettaptsetstnirpehtsmrof reP

pinnoitaxif ehttsu jdaot)nrettaplatnoziroh

.erusserp

)5(9.3.280 71PIN>80<90 dilos(71nrettaptsetstnirpehtsmrof reP

.erusserppinnoitaxif ehttsu jdaot)k calb

90 02PIN>90<90

2yb2(02nrettaptsetstnirpehtsmrof reP

pinnoitaxif ehttsu jdaot)nrettaplacitrev

.erusserp



2-33


(2) Operation for selecting the test item



2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key.


4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed to enter the selected item, the operation as shown in (3), (4), or

(5) on the following pages can be executed.


0 9 < 0 1 > C C C h e c k

0 9 < 0 2 > DB C h e c k

0 9 < 0 8 > N I P 1 7

0 9 < 0 9 > N I P 2 0

(To page 2-36)

(To page 2-36)

(To next page)

(To next page)

< 0 9 > T E S T



2-34

(3) Operation for executing operation to adjust the current voltage

This following describes the operation to adjust the current voltage operation taking an example

of subcode 01.

1 Press the [ENTER] key to select and enter the item. The device enters the test mode to adjust

the selected item. During the test, the machine displays the message showing the execution of

adjustment.

2 After the adjustment, press the [CANCEL] key. The operation stops and the maintenance

code 09, subcode01 display comes back.

3 When the [CANCEL] key is not pressed for 3 minutes after the adjustment, the maintenance

code 09, subcode 01display comes back.

0 9 - 0 1 C C C h e c k( E x e c u t i o n )

0 9 - 0 1 C C C h e c k( S t o p )

Several seconds later

0 9 - 0 1 C C C h e c k( E n d )

When the key is not pressed for 3

minutes, the test run stops.

Under testing

0 9 < 0 1 > C C C h e c k

"MAINTENANCE CODE 09 SUBCODE

01 DISPLAY"

(Return to previous page)(Continued from previous page)



2-35


Note: Whether the LED head is lighting or blinking may not be identified

depending on the surrounding environment.

(4) Operation for executing turning on or blinking in the LED head

Subcodes 05 and 06 allow you to respectively turn on and blink the LED head.

The procedures with subcode 06 are shown below:

1 Press the [ENTER] key to select and enter, the LED head starts blinking and the message

informing the current status appears on the screen.

2 When 10 seconds passed or the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the LED head stops blinking and

the maintenance code 09, subcode 07 display comes back.

0 9 - 0 6 L E D - H b l i n k( E x e c u t i o n )

0 9 - 0 6 L E D - H b l i n k

( S t o p )

0 9 - 0 6 L E D - H b l i n k( E n d )

When the key is not pressed for 10

seconds, the LED head stops blinking.

LED head is

blinking.

0 9 < 0 6 > L E D - H b l i n k


06 DISPLAY"

(Return to page 2-33)(Continued from page 2-33)



2-36

(5) Operation for executing the nip pressure adjustment print

Subcodes 07,08, and 09 allow you to print test patterns necessary to adjust the nip pressure of the

fixation. Subcode 07 outputs test pattern 5 (2 by 2 horizontal pattern) while Subcode 08 is

outputting test pattern 17(solid black). The procedures in case of SUBCODE 07 are shown

below:

1 Select the "Paper" parameter.

2 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed during the selection of paper, the maintenance 09,

subcode 10 display come back.

3 Select the paper and press the [ENTER] key, and printout starts.

4 After part of the paper comes out from the fixation, the machine stops unfeeding for about 10

seconds and then the paper is output completely.

5 When the printout is normally finished, the message informing the completion of process

appears and the maintenance 09, subcode 07 display comes back.

6 If an error occurs during the process, the error message appears.

0 9 - 0 7 N I P 5< S H >

0 9 - 0 7 N I P 5< R 1 >

0 9 - 0 7 N I P 5( P r i n t i n g )

Normal

termination

0 9 < 0 7 > N I P 5

"MAINTENANCE CODE 09 SUB CODE 07

DISPLAY"

(Return to page 2-33) (Continued from page 2-33)

0 9 - 0 7 N I P 5( P r i n t E n d )

Test pattern 7 is being

printed

Select and confirm the "Paper" parameter from the table shown below.

Display Description

<SH> Manual feed

<R1> Roll 1

<R2> Roll 2

<R3> Roll 3



2-37


2.3.10 Maintenance Code 10 "PRINT" (Print)

(1) Function

This code prints engine test patterns.

This code allows you to select and enter the test pattern connected to the subcode, determine the

parameters such as print length, and execute printout.

ecnanetniaMedoc

edocbuS yalpsiD )detnirpebotnrettaptset(noitcnuF

01

10 1tnirP>10<01 sepirtslacitrevk cihT:1nrettaP

20 2tnirP>20<01 :2nrettaP rek cehC

30 3tnirP>30<01 :3nrettaP sepirtslatnozirohk cihT

40 4tnirP>40<01 latnoziroh3yb1:4nrettaP

50 5tnirP>50<01 latnoziroh2yb2:5nrettaP

60 6tnirP>60<01 lacitrev41yb2:6nrettaP

70 7tnirP>70<01 hsemerauqstod-46,eniltod-1:7nrettaP

80 8tnirP>80<01 hsemtod-1:8nrettaP



11 11tnirP>11<01 tf ihstod-2,latnoziroh2yb2:11nrettaP

21 21tnirP>21<01 )etihw+k calb+hsemerauqs(:21nrettaP

31 31tnirP>31<01 )elacs+hsemerauqs(:31nrettaP

41 41tnirP>41<01 )eniltnalstod-1+hsemerauqs(:41nrettaP

51 51tnirP>51<01 )eniltnalstod-2+hsemerauqs(:51nrettaP

61 61tnirP>61<01 )eniltnalstod-2+eniltnalstod-1+hsemerauqs(:61nrettaP

71 71tnirP>71<01 k calbdiloS:71nrettaP

81 81tnirP>81<01 etihwdiloS:81nrettaP





2-38

(2) Operation for selecting the test pattern

1 If the maintenance code 10 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select

and Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 10, subcode 01 is displayed

initially.

2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the desired subcode, or test pattern.


4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the desired test pattern is selected and entered, the test pattern

can be printed as described on the next page.

"MAINTENANCE CODE 10 DIAPLAY"

1 0 < 0 1 > P r i n t 1

1 0 < 1 9 > P r i n t 1 9

1 0 < 2 0 > P r i n t 2 0

(To next page)

(To next page)

(To next page)

(To next page)1 0 < 0 2 > P r i n t 2

< 1 0 > P R I N T



2-39


Normal

termination of print

During printing(Terminated

in midway)

Select "Paper" parameter

Select "Print Length"

parameter

Set "Print Count"

parameter

(3) Operation for executing the print

The following describes the operation for selecting a test pattern and then executing the print,

taking an example of subcode 14.

1 Select the "Paper" parameter, and press the [ ] key.

2 Select the "Print Length" parameter, and press the [ ] key.

3 Set the "Print Count" parameter.

4 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during parameter selection, the "maintenance code 10,

subcode 14" display comes back.

5 Press the [ENTER] key to enter the parameters, and the print will start.

6 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during printing of multiple sheets, the print terminates and

the initial screen comes back.

7 When the print terminated normally, the "Print End" message is displayed and the initial

screen comes back.

8 If an error occurs during printing, the error message is displayed.

1 0 < 1 4 > P r i n t 1 4

1 0 - 1 4 P r i n t 1 4

< R 1 N > 2 1 0 mm 1

1 0 - 1 4 P r i n t 1 4R 2 N < 1 6 8 2 mm > 1

1 0 - 1 4 P r i n t 1 4

R 2 N 1 6 8 2 mm < 2 >

1 0 - 1 4 P r i n t 1 4( P r i n t i n g )

1 0 - 1 4 P r i n t 1 4( P r i n t E n d )

(Return to previous page) (Continued from previous

page)

"MAINTENANCE CODE 10, SUBCODE 14 DISPLAY"



2-40

Select the "Paper" parameter from the table below.

Select the "Print Length" parameter from the table below.

Display Description

<SH > Manual feed

<R1N> Roll 1, normal paper

<R1T> Roll 1, tracing paper<R1F> Roll 1, film


<R2T> Roll 2, tracing paper

<R2F> Roll 2, film


<R3T> Roll 3, tracing paper

<R3F> Roll 3, film

yalpsiD noitpircseD

>mm012< mm012 )senil1694(

>mm792< mm792 )senil6107(

>mm024< mm024 )senil1299(

>mm495< mm495 )senil23041(

>mm148< mm148 )senil66891(

>mm9811< mm9811 )senil78082(

>mm2861< mm2861 148= × 2 )senil33793(

>mm8732< mm8732 9811= × 2 )senil47165(

>mm3252< mm3252 148= × 3 )senil99595(

>mm0003< mm0003 )senil76807(

>mm0004< mm0004 )senil98449(

>mm0005< mm0005 )senil111811(

>mm0006< mm0006 )senil337141(

>mm0007< mm0007 )senil653561(

>mm0008< mm0008 )senil879881(

>mm0009< mm0009 )senil006212(

>mm00001< mm00001 )senil222632(

>"5.8< hcni5.8 mm9.512= )senil0015(

>"9< hcni9 mm6.822= )senil0045(

>"11< hcni11 mm4.972= )senil0066(

>"21< hcni21 mm8.403= )senil0027(

>"71< hcni71 mm8.134= )senil00201(

>"81< hcni81 mm2.754= )senil00801(

>"22< hcni22 mm8.855= )senil00231(

>"42< hcni42 mm6.906= )senil00441(

>"03< hcni03 mm0.267= )senil00081(

>"43< hcni43 mm6.368= )senil00402(

>"63< hcni63 mm4.419= )senil00612(

>"24< hcni24 mm8.6601= )senil00252(

>"44< hcni44 mm6.7111= )senil00462(

>"84< hcni84 mm2.9121= )senil00882(



2-41


Enter the "Print Sheets" parameter from the table below.

Display Description

< 1> Prints one test pattern.

< 2> Prints two test patterns continuously.

: :

<99> Prints 99 test patterns continuously.



2-42

2.3.11 Maintenance Code 11 "REGULATE" (Adjustment)

(1) Function

Performs the following adjustments.

After the "Paper" parameter is selected and entered in each adjustment, NVRAM and RAM

values of the engine control parameter are displayed as shown below:

1 1 - 0 1 F r o n t R e g i s t< A - N 1 > 2 2 0 : 2 2 0

PAPER parameter

"Adjustment" parameter

Engine control parameter

of NVRAM value

Engine control

parameter of

NVRAM value

For the number and description of the engine control parameter to be changed, see Section

2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Engine Control Parameter). For Save

method of parameter, see Section 2.3.12 (3) "Changing the parameter value in RAM." For

Save method of adjusted parameter, see Section "2.2.13 (3) Operation for saving the

parameter."

Maintenancecode

Subcode Display Function Refer to

11

01 11<01> Front Regist Executes printing for adjustment

of top edge registration. 2.3.11(3)

02 11<02> CenterRegist Executes printing for adjustment

of center registration. 2.3.11(4)

03 11<03> Print Length Executes printing for adjustment

of print length. 2.3.11(5)

04 11<04> Cut Length Executes printing for adjustment

of cut length. 2.3.11(3)



2-43



(To next page)

(2) Operation for selecting adjustment item


Enter the Maintenance Code," the adjustment function of the maintenance code 11,


2 Select a subcode (adjustment function) using [ ] or [ ] key.


4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed to enter the select adjustment item, the print for adjustment can

be executed as shown on the following page.

(To page 2-47)

(To page 2-49)

(To next page)

1 1 < 0 1 > F r o n t R e g i s t

1 1 < 0 2 > C e n t e r R e g i s t

1 1 < 0 3 > P r i n t L e n g t h

1 1 < 0 4 > C u t L e n g t h

< 1 1 > R E G U L A T E



2-44

Normal termination ofprint.

During printing.

(Terminated

in midway)

Select and enter the

"Paper (Length, Type,

Width)" parameter


"Adjust" parameter

I I I

(3) Operation for executing the print to adjust top register or cut length

The operating method of subcode 01 (top register adjustment) and subcode 04 (cut length

adjustment) is the same.

The following describes the operation for executing the print for adjustment, taking an example

of subcode 01 (top register adjustment).

1 Select "paper (length, type, width)" parameter, and press the [ ] key.

2 Set the "adjustment" parameter.

3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during parameter setting, the "maintenance code 11, subcode

01" display comes back.

4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed during parameter setting, three-sheet (one-sheet in the case of

manual feed) print starts.


screen comes back.

6 If an error occurs during printing, the error message is displayed.

1 1 - 0 1 F r o n t R e g i s t< A - N 1 > 2 2 0 : 2 2 0

1 1 - 0 1 F r o n t R e g i s tA - N 1 2 2 0 : < 2 2 0 >

1 1 - 0 1 F r o n t R e g i s tA - N 1 2 2 0 : < 2 2 1 >

1 1 - 0 1 F r o n t R e g i s t( P r i n t i n g )

1 1 - 0 1 F r o n t R e g i s t

( P r i n t E n d )

1 1 < 0 1 > F r o n t R e g i s t

"MAINTENANCE CODE 11 SUBCODE 01

DISPLAYED"


(Continued of previous

page)



2-45


Select the "Paper (Length, Type, Width)" parameter from the table below:

Display Description

<X-N0> Prints three sheets of 2523 mm long (print X) A0 width paper roll and normal paper.




<X-T0> Prints three sheets of 2523-mm long (print X) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper.




<X-F0> Prints three sheets of 2523-mm long (print X) A0-size-in-width roll film.




<A-N0> Prints three sheets of 841-mm long (print A) A0-size-in-width roll normal paper.




<A-T0> Prints three sheets of 841-mm long (print A) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper.




<A-F0> Prints three sheets of 841-mm long (print A) A0-size-in-width roll film.




<B-N0> Prints three sheets of 297-mm long (print B) A0-size-in-width roll normal paper.




<B-T0> Prints three sheets of 297-mm long (print B) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper.




<B-F0> Prints three sheets of 297-mm long (print B) A0-size-in-width roll film.




<C-N0> Prints three sheets of 210-mm long (print C) A0-size-in-width roll normal paper.




<C-T0> Prints three sheets of 210-mm long (print C) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper.




<C-F0> Prints three sheets of 210-mm long (print C) A0-size-in-width roll film.





< SH > Manual feed



2-47


Normal terminationof print.

During

printing.(Terminated

in midway)


"Paper" parameter


"Adjust" parameter

, , ,

(4) Operation for executing the print to center register adjustment

The operating method of subcode 02 (center register adjustment).

1 Select "Paper" parameter, and press the [ ] key.







screen comes back.


1 1 < 0 2 > C e n t e r R e g i s t "MAINTENANCE CODE 11 SUBCODE 02 DISPLAY"

(Return to page 2-43)

(Continued from page 2-43)

1 1 - 0 2 C e n t e r R e g i s t< R 1 > 5 0 : 5 0

1 1 - 0 2 C e n t e r R e g i s tR 1 5 0 : < 5 0 >

1 1 - 0 2 C e n t e r R e g i s tR 1 5 0 : < 4 9 >

1 1 - 0 2 C e n t e r R e g i s t( P r i n t i n g )

1 1 - 0 2 C e n t e r R e g i s t

( P r i n t E n d )



2-48

Select the PAPER parameter from the list shown below:

Print the pattern 13 (mesh + scale) sheet in normal 420 mm long (9921 lines) paper.

Hint: For description of the "Adjust" parameter, see Section 2.3.12 Engine

Control Parameter. For "Save method of parameter," see "Section 2.3.13

(3) Operation for saving the parameter."

Display Description

< R1 > Roll 1.

< R2 > Roll 2.< R3 > Roll 3.

< SH > Manual feed



2-49


(5) Operation for executing the print to plotting length adjustment

The operating method of subcode 03 (plotting length adjustment).

1 Select "Paper" parameter, and press the [ ] key.







screen comes back.


Normal termination

of print.

During

printing. (Terminated

in midway)


"Paper" parameter


"Adjust" parameter

I I I

1 1 < 0 3 > P r i n t L e n g t h"MAINTENANCE CODE 11 SUBCODE 03

DISPLAY"

(Return to page 2-43 )

(Continue of page 2-43)

1 1 - 0 3 P r i n t L e n g t h< R o - X > 1 9 2 3 : 1 9 2 3

1 1 - 0 3 P r i n t L e n g t hR o - X 1 9 2 3 : < 1 9 2 3 >

1 1 - 0 3 P r i n t L e n g t hR o - X 1 9 2 3 : < 1 9 2 4 >

1 1 - 0 3 P r i n t L e n g t h( P r i n t i n g )

1 1 - 0 3 P r i n t L e n g t h( P r i n t E n d )



2-50

Select and enter the “Paper” parameter from the table below:

The roll 1 paper feed takes precedence over all others, except for manual feed <SH>. That is:

When the paper is loaded to the roll 1 drawer, this drawer should be used.

When the paper is not loaded to the roll 1 drawer but the paper is loaded to the roll 2 drawer, the

roll 2 drawer should be used.

The normal paper is used and three sheets of test pattern 13 (mesh + scale) are printed.

Hint: For description of the "Adjust" parameter, see "Section 2.3.12 Engine

control parameter." For "Save method of parameter," see "Section 2.3.13

(3) Operation for saving the parameter."

yalpsiD noitpircseD

>C-TR< .)repapgnicart(repapllor)Ctnirp(gnolmm012

>C-FR< .)repapgnicart(repapllor)Ctnirp(gnolmm012

>X-oR< .repapllor)Xtnirp(gnolmm3252

>A-oR< .repapllor)Atnirp(gnolmm148

>B-oR< .repapllor)Btnirp(gnolmm792

>C-oR< .)repapnialp(repapllor)Ctnirp(gnolmm012

>HS< deef launaM



2-51


2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Parameter)

(1) Function

This code changes RAM values of engine control parameters.

RAM and NVRAM values of the engine control parameter are displayed on second and first

lines, respectively.

Immediately after the device is turned on, the engine control parameter is copied from NVRAM

to RAM. Therefore, if the value saved in RAM has not been changed after powering on, the same

value appears on both first and second lines.

Numbers for the operable engine parameters are as follows:

101 to 154, 201 to 263, 301 to 363, 401 to 463, 701 to 763, and 801 to 863

Parameters with any other numbers are not operable.

Note that values for numbers 155 to 163, 501 to 563, are indefinite.

Note: Even when the specified parameter is operable, it must not be changed

unreasonably provided that it is not listed in the engine control parameter

lists described on next pages.

Hint: For "Save method of parameter," see "Section 2.3.13 (3) Operation for

saving parameter."

Maintenancecode


12

101 12<101> 200

200Changes the RAM value of engine controlparameter 101.

102 12<102> 50


: : :

86312<863> 0


- 12<864> (If non operable number is specified, no value is

displayed.)

1 2 - 6 0 1 4 3 0< 4 3 0 >

Subcode

(engine control parameter number)

NVRAM value of engine

control parameter 601

RAM value of engine

control parameter 601



2-52

The print length of the paper roll determines the print category as table below. (The length of the

boundary may be changed.)

Print category Print length Typical length

Print X 28801 lines (approx. 1219 mm, approx. 48.002 inches)

or more 1682, 2378, 2523 mm etc.

Print A 9874 lines (approx. 418 mm, approx. 16.457 inches) to

59055 lines420, 594, 841, 1189, mm17, 18, 24, 36, 48 inches

Print B 6614 lines (approx. 280 mm, approx. 11.023 inches) to

9873 lines297 mm12 inches

Print C 4961 lines (approx. 210 mm, approx. 8.268 inches) to

6613 lines210 mm9, 11 inches

When incrementing the top edge registration adjustment value, the drawing on the paper is

shifted toward the direction opposite to the paper feed direction.

When incrementing the center registration adjustment value, the drawing on the paper is shifted

to the left.

When incrementing the plotting length adjustment value, the drawing on the paper is shortened

in the papear feed direction.

When incrementing the cut length adjustment value, the cut length of the paper roll is shortened.



2-53


Table 2-4 Engine Control Parameter List (1/4)

Engine control parameter PAPERparameter

Standardvalue

Input range Uni t of inputNo. Description

601

602

603

604

605

606

607

608

609

610

611

612

Top edge

registration

adjustment

value

Print X, normal paper, A0 width paper roll

normal paper, A1 width paper roll



tracing paper, A0 width paper roll




film, A0 width paper roll




X-N0

X-N1

X-N2

X-N3

X-T0

X-T1

X-T2

X-T3

X-F0

X-F1

X-F2

X-F3

430

430

430

430

430

430

430

430

430

430

430

430

Standard value:

± 100

(300-500)

To front To rear

1 msec

(equivalent to 0.8

mm)

Reference:

1 mm=12.5

4 mm=50

8 mm=100

613

614

615

616

617618

619

620

621

622

623

624

Print A, normal paper, A0 width paper roll




tracing paper, A0 width paper rolltracing paper, A1 width paper roll







A-N0

A-N1

A-N2

A-N3

A-T0A-T1

A-T2

A-T3

A-F0

A-F1

A-F2

A-F3

430

430

430

430

430430

430

430

430

430

430

430

625

626

627

628

629

630

631

632633

634

635

636

Print B, normal paper, A0 width paper roll







tracing paper, A3 width paper rollfilm, A0 width paper roll




B-N0

B-N1

B-N2

B-N3

B-T0

B-T1

B-T2

B-T3B-F0

B-F1

B-F2

B-F3

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

400400

400

400

400

637

638

639

640

641

642

643

644

645

646

647648

Print C, normal paper, A0 width paper roll










film, A2 width paper rollfilm, A3 width paper roll

C-N0

C-N1

C-N2

C-N3

C-T0

C-T1

C-T2

C-T3

C-F0

C-F1

C-F2C-F3

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

400400

649 Manual feed paper SH 430

658 Waste toner bottle

(Set 1 when the large capacity waste toner bottle is installed.) - 0 0, 1

0: Strike bottle

1: Does not strike

bottle

659 Type of process cartridge - 2 0, 2

0: New type

(Type 2)

2: Old type

662 Process cartridge consumption over warning - 1 0, 1 1: Warns.

0: Does not warn.

663 Front clip amount - 71 0-255

1 line

Reference

3 mm=71



2-54



Standardvalue

Input range Unit of inputNo. Description

701

Center registration adjustment

value

Roll 1 R1 50

0-100

To light To left

8 dots

(equivalent to

0.338666 mm)

(equivalent to

0.01233

inches)

[Reference]

1 mm=2.95

702 Roll 2 R2 50

703 Roll 3 R3 50

704 Manual feed paper R4 50

708 Head A turn-on delay time Head A (right side) 160-65 8 µsec

709 Head C turn-on delay time Head C (left side) 16

710 Line memory write start bank 94 Fixed to 94

711Line memory

read start bank

Head A (right side) 90 87-93

712 Head B (center) 0 Fixed to 0

713 Head C (left side) 90 87-93

718

Plotting length accuracy

adjustment value

Paper roll (tracing paper),

print C RT-C 1895

719 Paper roll (film), print C RF-C 1895

720 Paper roll, print X Ro-X 1915

1910 to 1936

Increased Reduced 1 Hz

721 Paper roll, print A Ro-A 1915

722 Paper roll, print B Ro-B 1909

723 Paper roll (plain paper),

print C Ro-C 1985

724 Manual feed paper SH 1915

728 Time conversion value of line quantity [line/sec] 1915 1910-1936 1 line

731

Strobe width

Head A (right side) 29

15-39

0.0833 µsec

732 Head B (center) 29

733 Head C (left side) 29

734

Strobe width step


2-8735 Head B (center) 5


737

Strobe width step 2

(fine adjustment per drawing)


1-60.0833 µsec738 Head B (center) 2




2-56



Standardvalue

Input range Unit of inputNo. Description

801

802

803

804

805

806

807

808

809

810

811

812

Cut length

adjustment

value

Print X, normal paper, A0 width paper roll










film ,A2 width paper roll


X-N0

X-N1

X-N2

X-N3

X-T0

X-T1

X-T2

X-T3

X-F0

X-F1

X-F2

X-F3

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

Standard value

± 200

(100 to 500)

longer shorter

1 line

(equivalent to

0.042333 mm)

(equivalent to

0.001667

inches)

Reference:

1 mm=23.62

4.23 mm=100

8.47 mm=200

0.1667

inches=100

0.5 inches=300

1.0 inches=600

813

814

815

816

817818

819

820

821

822

823

824

Print A, normal paper, A0 width paper roll




tracing paper, A0 width paper rolltracing paper, A1 width paper roll







A-N0

A-N1

A-N2

A-N3

A-T0A-T1

A-T2

A-T3

A-F0

A-F1

A-F2

A-F3

300

300

300

300

300300

300

300

300

300

300

300

825

826

827

828

829

830

831

832833

834

835

836

Print B, normal paper, A0 width paper roll







tracing paper, A3 width paper rollfilm, A0 width paper roll




B-N0

B-N1

B-N2

B-N3

B-T0

B-T1

B-T2

B-T3B-F0

B-F1

B-F2

B-F3

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300300

300

300

300

837

838

839

840

841

842

843

844

845

846

847848

Print C, normal paper, A0 width paper roll










film ,A2 width paper rollfilm, A3 width paper roll

C-N0

C-N1

C-N2

C-N3

C-T0

C-T1

C-T2

C-T3

C-F0

C-F1

C-F2C-F3

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300300

850

Rear edge margin for print X

(When the margin is ensured, the cut length of the paper

roll will be increased by that margin.)

- 0 0-4500

1 line

Reference

120 mm=2835

4.725 inches

861 How to stop the slitter cutter motor - 0 0, 1

0: Without

brake

1: With brake

862 Switching between the display in meter and feet - 0 0, 1

0: [m] Display

in meter

1: [ft] Display

in feet



2-57


(2) Operation for selecting the parameter number



2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the desired subcode, or engine control parameter number.


4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to set and entered the parameter, the RAM value of the

specified engine control parameter can be changed.

5 If non operable parameter number is specified, the [ENTER] key is inactive.


(To next page)

(To next page)

1 2 < 6 0 1 > 4 3 04 3 0

1 2 < 6 0 2 > 4 3 04 3 0

1 2 < 8 6 4 >

1 2 < 8 6 5 >

The ENTER

key is

inactive.

The ENTER

key is

inactive.

< 1 2 > P A R A M E T E R



2-58

Change the RAM value (NVRAM value is not

changed)

(3) Operation for changing the parameter of the RAM value

Indicate the change operation engine control parameter of the RAM value.

In the example shown below, you should change the RAM value of parameter number 602 from

430 to 420.

1 After the desired parameter is set and entered, the RAM value on the second line is marked

with angle brackets.

2 Press the [ ] key to move the underscore to the left (digit).

3 Press the [ ] key to reduce "3" marked with the underscore to "2."

4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed (set and entered), the RAM value is changed and the

maintenance code12, subcode 602 display come back.

5 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the device returns to the home display without changing

the RAM value.

1 2 < 6 0 2 > 4 3 04 2 0

(Move the underscore to the

adjacent left digit)


(Reduce "3" to "2")

1 2 - 6 0 2 4 3 0< 4 3 0 >

1 2 - 6 0 2 4 3 0< 4 3 0 >

1 2 - 6 0 2 4 3 0< 4 2 0 >

1 2 < 6 0 2 > 4 3 04 3 0


602 DISPLAYED"

(Return to previous page )

For the save method of parameter used to make the NVRAM value identical to the RAM value,

see "Section 2.3.13 (3) Operation for saving the parameter."



2-60

(3) Operation for saving the parameter

This following describes operation to save the RAM value of an engine control parameter to

NVRAM after it is changed with maintenance code 11 or 12. The value saved to NVRAM will be

loaded to RAM when the device is turned on.

1 Select and enter subcode 01, the confirmation message appears to ask if you really want to

save the engine control parameter.

2 When the [ENTER] key is pressed in response to the message, the RAM value of the engine

control parameter is saved to NVRAM.

3 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the RAM value is not saved to NVRAM.

1 3 < 0 1 > R A M > N V R A MS a v e P a r a m e t e r

1 3 < 0 1 > R A M > N V R AM( S a v e O K ? )

1 3 < 0 1 > RA M > N V R A M( S a v e E n d )

"MAINTENANCE CODE 13 SUBCODE 01 DISPLAY"

(Return to previous page) (Continued from previous page)

The display appears

2 to 3 seconds after The RAM value is saved to NVRAM



2-61


(4) Operation for initializing the NAVRAM

This following describes operation to reset the NVRAM value of the engine control parameter to

the default (ROM value).

1 Select and enter subcode 02, the confirmation message appears.

2 When the ENTER key is pressed in response to the message, the NVRAM value of the engine

control parameter is reset to the ROM value.

3 When the CANCEL key is pressed, the NVRAM value is not reset.

1 3 < 0 2 > ROM > N V R A M

P a r a m e t e r I n i t i a l i z e

1 3 - 0 2 R OM > N V R AM( I n i t i a l i z e O K ? )

1 3 < 0 2 > ROM > N V R A M

( I n i t i a l i z e E n d )

"MAINTENANCE CODE 13 SUBCODE 02

DISPLAY"

(Return to page 2-59) (Continued from page 2-58)

The display appears

2 to 3 seconds after The NVRAM value is reset to the default (ROM value)

Since defaults are optimal to each engine firmware version, some of them may differ from the

standard values shown on the engine control parameter lists.



2-62

2.3.14 Maintenance Code 14 "USER PARAMETER" (User-defined engine parameter)

(1) Function

Change the user-defined engine parameters.

Changing the parameter value is only available in the engine maintenance mode. The change will

not affect the controller settings.

Even when the value has been changed, turning on the device resets the value to the default.

ecnanetniaMedoc

edocbuS yalpsiD noitcnuF

41

10 tisneD>10<41

3:LAMRON ytisnedtnirp"ehtsegnahcdnasyalpsiD ."

20 evaSrewoP>20<41

0:FFO tesevasrewop"ehtsegnahcdnasyalpsiD ."

30 tuCnepO.D>30<41

0:FFO tucneporood"ehtsegnahcdnasyalpsiD ."

40 remiTtuC.E>40<410:FFO

remittucegdepot"ehtsegnahcdnasyalpsiD ."

50 edomrepap-T>50<41

1:1EDOM edomrepapgnicart"ehtsegnahcdnasyalpsiD ."



2-63



(To next page)

(To next page)

(To next page)

(To next page)

(2) Operation for selecting the user-defined engine parameter



2 Select the user-defined engine parameter using [ ] or [ ] key.


4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to select and enter the parameter, you can change the

specified user defined engine parameter.

< 1 4 > U S E R P A R A M

1 4 < 0 1 > D e n s i t yN O R M A L : 3

1 4 < 0 2 > P o w e r S a v eO F F : 0

1 4 < 0 4 > E . C u t T i m e rO F F : 0

1 4 < 0 5 > T - p a p e r m o d e

M O D E 1 : 1



2-64

Change the print density to thick.

1 4 - 0 1 D e n s i t yT H I C K : 5


1 4 - 0 1 D e n s i t y< N O R M A L : 3 >

1 4 - 0 1 D e n s i t y< R A T H E R T H I C K : 4 >

1 4 - 0 1 D e n s i t y< T H I C K : 5 >

1 4 < 0 1 > D e n s i t yN O R MA L : 3

"MAINTENANCE CODE 14 DISPLAYED"


(3) Operation for changing the user-defined engine parameter

This following describes operation to change the user-defined engine parameter.

In the example shown below, you should change "Density" from "Normal" to "Thick"

(subcode 01).

1 After the desired parameter is select and entered, the parameter value on the second line is

marked with angle brackets.

2 When the [ENTER] key is pressed, the parameter value is changed and the maintenance

code 14, subcode 01display comes back.

3 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the device returns to the home display without

changing the parameter.



2-65


Select user-defined engine control parameter values from the table below:

LEVEL1: The fixation temperature is decreased to 100°C. When the temperature reaches 100°C,

halogen lamps are operated (i.e. turn-on or turn-off).LEVEL2: The halogen lamp is completely turned off.

"Door Open Cut" setting Description

<OFF :0> 0: Off (The door open cut is not executed.) (Default)

< ON :1> 1: On (the door open cut is executed.)

"Print density" setting Description

< THIN :1> 1: Thin

< RATHER THIN :2> 2: Slightly thin

< NORMAL :3> 3: Normal (Default)

<RATHER THICK :4> 4: Slightly thick

< THICK :5> 5: Thick

"Top Edge Cut Timer" setting Description

< OFF :0> 0: Off (The edge cut is not executed.) (Default)

< 30min :1> 1: 30 minutes

< 60min :2> 2: 60 minutes (1 hour)

<120min :3> 3: 120 minutes (2 hours)

<240min :4> 4: 240 minutes (4 hours)

< 1min :5> 5: Approx. 1 minute



"Tracing paper Mode" setting Description

<MODE1 :1> 1: Mode 1 (Default)

<MODE2 :2> 2: Mode 2

gnittes"evaSrewoP" noitpircseD

>0:FFO< )tluaf eD(.edomevasrewopehtretnetonseoD:0

>1:1LEVEL-nim51< .setunim51retf aedomevasrewop1levelehtsretnE:1



4:1LEVEL-nim09< .setunim09retf aedomevasrewop1levelehtsretnE:4



7:2LEVEL-nim06< .setunim06retf aedomevasrewop2levelehtsretnE:7




2-66

2.3.15 Maintenance Code 15 "ROLL WIDTH" (Paper roll print width)

(1) Function

Change the print width of roll paper.

Changing the parameter value is only available in the engine maintenance mode.

The change will not affect the controller settings.

Even when the value has been changed, turning on the device resets the value to the default.

ecnanetniaMedoc

edocbuS yalpsiD noitcnuF

51

10 lloR-0A>10<51

mm148

tnirpllorrepapehtsegnahcdnasyalpsiD

0Aottnelaviuqeebotdegdu jsitahthtdiw

.htdiwrepap

20 lloR-1A>20<51

mm495


1Aottnelaviuqeebotdegdu jsitahthtdiw.htdiwrepap

30 lloR-2A>30<51

mm024



.htdiwrepap

40 lloR-3A>40<51

mm792



.htdiwrepap



2-67


(2) Operation for selecting the paper roll print width



2 Select the roll width using [ ] or [ ] key.

3 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the user defin engine parameter.

4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to select and enter the parameter, the print width can be

changed.


(To next page)

(To next page)

(To next page)

(To next page)

1 5 < 0 1 > A 0 - R o l l8 4 1 mm

1 5 < 0 2 > A 1 - R o l l5 9 4 mm

1 5 < 0 3 > A 2 - R o l l4 2 0 mm

1 5 < 0 4 > A 3 - R o l l2 9 7 mm

< 1 5 > RO L L W I D T H



2-68

(3) Operation for changing the paper roll print width

This following describes operation to change for print width of the paper roll.

In the example shown below, you should change the print width of the paper roll, which is judged

to be equivalent to subcode 01 and A0 paper width, from "841 mm" to "36 inch."

1 After the desired parameter is set and entered, the parameter value on the second line is marked

with angle brackets.

2 Press the [ ] or [ ] key until "36 inch" appears on the display.

3 When the [ENTER] key is pressed, the parameter value is changed and the maintenance

code15, subcode 01 display comes back.

4 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the device returns to the home display without changing

the parameter value.

Change the "841 mm" to "36 inch."

1 5 - 0 1 A 0 - R o l l3 6 ”


1 5 - 0 1 A 0 - R o l l< 8 4 1 mm >

1 5 - 0 1 A 0 - R o l l< 8 8 0 mm >

1 5 - 0 1 A 0 - R o l l< 3 6 ” >

1 5 < 0 1 > A 0 - R o l l8 4 1 mm


01 DISPLAY"


, , ˙ ˙ ˙

Indicate the default.



2-69


Select the print width of the paper roll from the table below:

A0 width equivalent paper roll Meaning of value

< 841mm> 841 mm: A0 width (default)

< 880mm> 880 mm

< 900mm> 900 mm

< 910mm> 910 mm

< 914mm> 914 mm

< 30 " > 30 inch = 762.0 mm

< 34 " > 34 inch = 863.6 mm

< 36 " > 36 inch = 914.4 mm


< 594mm> 594 mm :A1 width (default)

< 610mm> 610 mm

< 620mm> 620 mm

< 700mm> 700 mm

< 707mm> 707 mm

< 22 " > 22 inch = 558.8 mm

< 24 " > 24 inch = 609.6 mm



< 310mm> 310 mm

< 11 " > 11 inch = 279.4 mm

< 12 " > 12 inch = 304.8 mm



< 310mm> 310 mm

< 11 " > 11 inch = 279.4 mm

< 12 " > 12 inch = 304.8 mm



2-70

Maintenance

code Subcode Display Function

16

01 16<01>[0002]

03-06(09:30) 120

Displays the latest process cartridge

information.

02 16<02>[0001]

03-05(18:32) 5400m

Displays the second latest process cartridge

information.

: : :

10 16<10>[ ]

Displays the tenth latest process cartridge

information. (If there is no information, the

error code is left blank.)

2.3.16 Maintenance Code 16 "PROCESS LOG" (Process Cartridge Consumption Log)

(1) Function

This code displays the information on up to ten latest process cartridges replaced in the past.

The process cartridge information is displayed as follows:

1 6 < 0 1 > [ 0 0 0 2 ]0 3 - 0 6 ( 0 9 : 3 0 ) 1 2 0 m

Final application date and time

Month/day, hour/minute

(March 6, 9H30M)

Process cartridge consumption

[Distance]

(120 m)

Process cartridge number



2-71


(2) Operation for displaying the process cartridge consumption log


Enter the Maintenance Code," the process cartridge information of the maintenance code

16, subcode 01 is displayed initially.

2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select desired subcodes to display and check settings one after

another.


"MAINTENANCE CODE16 DISPLAY"

1 6 < 0 1 > [ 0 0 0 2 ]0 3 - 0 6 ( 0 9 : 3 0 ) 1 2 0 m

1 6 < 0 2 > [ 0 0 0 1 ]0 3 - 0 5 ( 1 8 : 3 2 ) 5 4 0 0 m

1 6 < 0 9 > [ ]

1 6 < 1 0 > [ ]

< 1 6 > P RO C E S S L OG



2-72

2.4 Message

The table below lists the messages displayed on the second line of the LCD during operations on

the device such as printing, and their meanings.

Message Description

( Set date&time! ) NVRAM is not initialized. (The time is also not set.)

The initialized pattern is rewritten.

( SW4 DIPSW-1:ON ) Bit 1 of the 8-bit DIP switch (SW5) is set to the ON position.

Message Description

( Warming up 12345 ) The machine is warming up.

The figure is a countdown time.

( Printing ) During printing

( Print End ) The printout is normally terminated.

( Print Stop ) The machine is executing the print stop process.

( Execution ) The machine is executing the operation.

( End ) The operation is completed.

( Stop ) The machine is executing the operation stop process.

( Door Open ) The door is opened.

( Door8 Open ) Door 8 (manual paper feed holder) is opened. (When manual

feed is not used, door 8 must be closed.)

( Toner Empty ) The toner is run out.

( TonerDoor Open ) The toner inner door is opened.

( WT-Bottle Full ) The waste toner bottle is filled.

( WT-Bottle Off ) The waste toner bottle is not mounted.

( Process Off ) The process cartridge is not mounted.

( Paper End ) The paper is run out.

( Paper JAM [3400] ) Paper jam occurred,

(The figure in the brackets is error code. )

( ERROR [2038] ) Unrecoverable error occurred.

(The figure in the brackets is error code.



3-1

Chapter 3 Maintenance Person Mode


This device supports the maintenance person mode that cannot be defined by users. Chapter 3

describes functions and operations of those menus specific to maintenance people. To access and

use this mode, you must enter the password.

3.1 Enter to Maintenance Person Mode

1 Press the key to activate the offline mode.

2 Press the keys in the following order.

3 Enter the password by pressing the keys in the following order.

The above operating sequence is the same as user-defined menus. When the setup is completed

and the key is pressed to return to the data prompt display, the maintenance person mode is

automatically quitted.

P R I N T R E A D Y

M E N U# S E T U P

P A S SW O R DI N P U T MO D E

I N P U T O KL E V E L 0 0 3

M E N U# S E T U P

Data wait display

Setup display

The display appears as shown right

and the display enters the

maintenance person mode.



3-2

3.2 Functions of Maintenance Person Mode Menus

Maintenance person's special menu supports 16 options as shown below. (1) - (3) are the menu

options in the function menus, (4) - (14) are that of the system menus, and (15) and (16) are thatof the device menu.

HINT: The parameter marked with underscore (_) is a factory default.

(1) HDD FORMAT (FUNCTION)

Function: Performs the formats of internal hard disk.

(2) NVRAM FORMAT (FUNCTION)

Function: Performs the formats of NVRAM.

(3) VERSION UPGRADE (FUNCTION)

Function: Performs version upgrading of the system firmware using the maintenance CF

card.

(4) FACTORY SET (SYSTEM)

Function: Initializes the parameter of user defined item. However, the device serial num-

ber is not initialized.

(5) SERIAL NO (SYSTEM)

Function: Enter the serial number of the plotter.

Parameter: 00000 to 65535 (decimal number)

(6) CUSTOM (POINT PLOT) (SYSTEM - SYSTEM CUSTOM)

Function: This parameter determines whether "POINT PLOT" will be displayed with the

HPGL format parameter.

Parameter: OFF: Not display

ON: Display

Supplementary explanation:

Selecting "ON" for this setting allows modifying setting of the following pa-

rameters with HPGL format parameters.

Designation: POINT PLOT

ON: A single point is plotted. (Default)

OFF: A single point is not plotted.

(7) SNMP TRAP NUM. (SYSTEM - COMM.- PARAM. - ETHRNET - DETAIL ITEM)

Function: Specifies the number of SNMP TRAP tables. The TRAP table refers to the

table accessed from "TRAPnn Manager" to "TRAPnn: PORT."

Parameter: 1 to 20 (Default: 2)



3-3


(8) ALTERNATIVE INTERFACE (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - USB)

Function: This parameter enables or disables the alternative setup for the USB interface.

The default setting is OFF. This parameter is used together with SIIT's PC

driver. When the user does not want to use SIIT's driver and desires to establish

IEEE1284-compatible communications controlled under the printer device

class, which is defined according to the USB interface, you should select AL-

TERNATIVE INTERFACE.

Parameter : OFF : Invalid

ON : Valid

(9) TIMING MODE (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)

Function: Specifies the parallel interface communication conditions (signal timing).

Setting: NORMAL

FASTSLOW

MANUAL (Displayed the maintenance person defined level mode.)

(10) ACK ON TIME (30 ns) (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)

Function: Specifies ACKNOWLEDGE on time.

Parameter: 1 to 127 (Default: 80)

(11) ACK PULSE (30 ns) (SYSTEM - COM PARAMETER - PARALLEL)

Function: Specifies ACKNOWLEDGE pulse width.

Setting: 1 to 127 (Default: 80)

(12) BUSY OFF TIMING (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)

Function: Specifies BUSY signal off timing.

Parameter: ACK FALL EDGE

ACK RISE EDGE

(13) SELECT SIGNAL (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)

Function: Specifies whether the SELECT signal is turned on or off.

Parameter: ON: Always turned on (active).

OFF/ON: The setting varies depending on whether the device is in online

or offline state.

(14) AF SIGNAL DIR. (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)

Function: Specifies AF (auto feed) signal direction.

Parameter: INPUT: The AF signal is handled as input.

OUTPUT: The AF signal is handled as output.



3-4

(15) Special setting 2 (Device)

Function Used from the Web when adjusting the scanner.

Parameters 00 - FF Default value: 00

(16) Special setting 3 (Device)

Function Selects whether an error of H/W on MRC2 board (PES under run error) is to

detected or not.

(This parameter should normally be set to OFF)

Parameter OFF: Does not detect the error

ON: Detects the error



3-5


3.3 How to turn on the maintenance person mode on Web

<Procedure>

1 See the "remote control startup procedure" in the User's Guide and display the plotter's webscreen.

2 Enter password CSCCSUDR (8 upper case characters in half-size) to the password input area

of the menu on the left side of the page and then click [Login].

3.4 Maintenance Person's Special Web Functions

If a trouble occurred at a user, using the "Maintenance Information Acquisition" function allows

collecting the information necessary to locate the cause of a controller error.

<Procedure>

1 Log in the maintenance person mode of the Web

2 Click "Maintenance" on the left side of the page to display the maintenance page.

3 Click "3. Maintenance Information" on the "Maintenance " page to display the "Special

maintenance" page.

4 Click [Upload] to save the information file to PC.

5 Return to the "Maintenance" page and click "5. All Ports and PDL Parameters Import/Export"

to display the "Ports & PDL Import/Export" page for All ports and All PDL setting.

6 Click [Export] to save the setup file to PC.

7 When above operations were implemented from a user's PC, finally enter "logout" in the

password field of the menu and click [Login]. Make sure the display above the password field

is changed to Level: "user".



4-1

Chapter 4 Regular Inspection


This chapter describes regular inspection and maintenance.



4-2

4.1 Regular Inspection Operation Items and Procedure

The regular inspection must be executed every 12 months, as a rule. On the other hand, 6 month

interval is recommended for the preventive maintenance that is necessary to maintain theacceptable image quality. Table 4-1 below lists regular inspection items and procedures.

Note: Before replacing a part, be sure to contact the user and obtain his/her

approval.

Table 4-1 Regular Inspection Item List

(1 / 2)

No. Item Operation Cleaning Replacement* Refer to

1 Operation check of single plotter Execute "MENU PRINT" in the function menuto check

—— —— User'smanual

2 Check the plotting specifications

and image quality

Enter the engine maintenance mode and output

engine test patterns to check and evaluate the

specifications and quality.

(Test pattern) No.15

(Paper feed position) Upper and lower ports

(Paper size) All sizes

(Number of outputs) 1 sheet, each

—— —— 2.2.10

3 Inspection of gas spring

When the spring has reached the end of service

life (the replacement timing is indicated on the

warning label (see page v)), replace the part.

—— —— 8.2.35

4 Cleaning of SLA Clean the SLA (LED head lens) with a cotton

cloth. 5 km —— ——

5 Cleaning of roller (1) and rollers on

both sides of head

Dampen a rag with water and wring itsufficiently, and wipe the toner off on each roller

surface.

5 km 150 km ——

6 Cleaning of charge wires (2) and

(3).

Use cotton seagull soused in ethanol (ethyl

alcohol) for the cleaning. 5 km

20 km

(Wire) ——

7 Cleaning of DEV seat Wipe the toner off the DEV seat with a dry cotton

cloth. 5 km —— ——

8 Cleaning of bottom fore-

transcription guide

Dampen a rag with water and wring it

sufficiently, and wipe the toner off on the bottom

fore-transcription guide.

5 km —— ——

9

Cleaning of pinch and registration

rollers, cutaway rollers, pinch roller

ASSY.

If the parts are heavily soiled, dampen a rag with

water and wring it sufficiently, and wipe the

toner and paper chips off on each roller surface.

After the cleaning, dry the parts completely.

10 km —— ——

10 Check of replacement timing of

developer unit

When the developer unit has reached the end of

service life, replace the part. —— 100 km ——

11 Cleaning of DV spacer

When the spacer is heavily soiled, wipe it with a

dry cloth while turning the roller.5 km 100 km ——

Note: Do not touch the magnet roller with bare

hands.

12 Cleaning the seats of magnet rolls

R and L

When the toner has been spilled out, wipe off the

toner. 5 km 100 km ——

13 Cleaning of DEVT cover When the cover is heavily soiled, clean the inside

wall with a vacuum cleaner. 5 km —— ——

14 Cleaning of paper feed, remaining,

and rewind rollers

When the rollers are heavily soiled, dampen a rag

with water and wring it sufficiently, and wipe

each roller surface. After the cleaning, dry the

parts completely.

Execute the cleaning for both upper and lower

stages of the paper feed unit.

10 km —— ——



4-3


* Figures in this column are only criteria. The replacement timing depends on the actual operating

environment and cleaning intervals. You can see cleaning and replacement intervals, using

maintenance code 02 and 03 in the engine criteria maintenance mode (see Sections 2.3.2 and2.3.3).

** Before restarting the device after the completion of necessary inspections, clean the interior of the

machine.

Table 4-1 Regular Inspection Item List

(2 / 2)

No. Item Operation Cleaning Replacement* Refer to

15 Cleaning of slitter cutterOpen the rear cover and remove paper chips.

10 km —— ——Note: Be careful that you will not be injured by

the cutter blade.

16 Cleaning of out fuser separation

finger

When the ends of the separation finger are

heavily soiled by the toner, wipe it off with a rag. 10 km 100 km ——

17 Inspection of fuser thermistors

(TH01, TH02, TH04)

When the parts have reached the end of service

life, replace them.5 km 100 km ——

Note: Pay attention not to bend the leaf spring

fixed.

18 Cleaning of heat and backup

rollers

Dampen a cotton cloth with heat roller cleaner

and wipe each roller surface.5 km 100 km ——

Note: Wipe the cleaned surfaces with a dry

cloth.

19 Check of belt (TRANS)Check the mount condition.

5 km 100 km ——Note: Pay attention not to break the arm of

PS06 for the belt

20 Confirmation of user's operating

environment

Check whether the user has used the device under

the specified operating conditions, including

temperature and humidity.

—— —— ——

21 Confirmation of consumable

parts

Check whether the user is using the consumable

parts specified by Seiko I Infotech. —— —— ——



5-1

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)


This chapter describes troubleshooting where an error occurred in the controller. If a trouble

occurs on the device, the error lamp is turned on. (In case of warning, the lamp is not lit.) In

addition, an error message appears on the LCD. When the error message is displayed, find the

cause and place and remove the trouble. If the error message is not displayed, judge the place

based on the symptom and remove the trouble. Classified errors and codes supported errors are

identified by 4-digit hexadecimal numbers (example: E E56E-01FF).

5.1 Type of Error Messages

Error messages are classified into four categories as shown below according to the type of

trouble.

(1) Operator call error

This error message shows troubles that the operator can handle: for example, replacement of

consumables. Operator call errors are further classified into errors that the operator can handle

and those that our Service Center must handle.

(2) Operator report warning

This error message is the warning information addressed to the operator: for example,

replacement of consumables is oncoming.

(3) Warning

This error message shows incomplete system environment or setup: for example, communication

error or faulty data.

(4) Service call error

This error message shows troubles that are attributable to defective parts, faulty media, or

program error, and must be handled by our Service Center.



5-2

5.2 Troubleshooting Against Operator Call Error

"Operator call errors" can be handled by the operator. When this type of error occurs, you should

request the user to troubleshoot the machine based on the error message displayed. If the samesymptom recurs frequently, you should remove the trouble according to the instructions

described in "Chapter 6 Maintenance Person."

(For detailed descriptions on troubles relating to door open / close and consumables, see the

user's guide.)

Description: The roll 1 drawer is opened.

Measure: Close the roll 1 drawer.

Description: The roll 2 drawer is opened. (For 2- or 3-tray model)


Description: The roll 3 drawer is opened (For 3-tray model).


Description: The paper is jammed in the machine.

Measure: Troubleshoot the machine according to the guidance displayed.

Description: The machine detects the damaged setup area checksum after powering on.

Measure: Press key to display the default setting selection screen.

Using , and , select and execute the type of the default setting.

Description: This error message may appear if the serial number at powering on is not specified.

Measure: Specify the serial number of the device. (see Section 5.10 Serial Number Not Set.)

C L O S E D O O R 1

O P E N D O O R X , XR E MO V E P A P E R

C L O S E D O O R 2

C L O S E D O O R 3

O P E N D O OR XR E MO V E P A P E R

One door is displayed Two or more doors are displayed

E S E T T H E S / N

S E T U P I S W R O N G# I N I T I A L S E T



5-3


5.3 Operator Notice Warning

Description: The saved job has been damaged, and thus the spool area is initialized (When

HDD is installed).

Measure: After 3 seconds, the message changes to "WAIT A MOMENT" and then the

device starts.

Description: The data is received in the format not supported by the device, and thus the datawas ignored.

Measure: Use the data received in the format supported by this device.

Description: The spool area on the HDD has been damaged, and thus the memory spool area

is used (When HDD is installed).

Measure: Replace the HDD

Description: The nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) on the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (MRC2 Board)

is damaged. Usual printing is executable while some functions do not work

correctly. Currently, only the accounting information printout function in the

function menu is affected by this error.

Measure: Execute NVRAM format in the function menu. If the error is not removed,

replace the MRC2 board.

Description: This message appears if there is an unprocessed job (jobs standing by for pro-

cessing) at powering on.

Measure: Select whether the job is deleted or not by pressing the key or key.

The operation goes in time out in about 10 seconds unless the key is pressed,

and the device starts with the job save.

W S P OO L I N I T I A L I Z E DJ O B WA S D E L E T E D

W J OB WA S D E L E T E D

D E L E T E J O B ?Y = E N T E R N = C A N C E L

W S P O O L E R R O R

W N V R AM E R RO R



5-4

Table 5-1 If a Job has been Left at Powering on

Description: This message appears if the nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) on the PCB-

ASSY-MRC2 (MRC2 board) is not initialized.

Measure: The display of this warning message remains until the key is pressed.

After the key was pressed, the NVRAM is initialized automatically and

the display changes to the language setting specifically for the installing opera-

tion.

Job status Display Transaction

Standing for

processing

DELETE JOB? Job is deleted by designation.

Processing — Job is automatically moved to "already

processed" job.

Processed — Jobs are automatically deleted from the

oldest job in order.

W U N - I N I T . N V R AM



5-5


(2) Mail interface

nnnn: Error code

Table 5-3 Mail Warning List

5.4 Warning

5.4.1 Communication Error

A communication error message appears if any communication error occurs between the

computer and the device.

This type of error can be handled by the system administrator of the user.

Note: A communication error appears on the LCD, but it disappears when the next

operation is performed. Consequently, you may not find the that error

occurred. In such a case, retransmit the data to check if the communication

error is displayed on the LCD.

(1) Ethernet interface

nnn: Error code

Table 5-2 Ethernet Warning List

W I N T E R F A C E - L N n n n n

W I N T E R F A C E - M L n n n n

edocrorrE noitpircseD erusaeM

1010 rebmuntropTPXf onoitacilpuD .sgnittesenihcamtcerroC

2120 yromemlanretnif ok caLybrorresihtmorf derevocertonsiecivedehtf I

gniwollof ehtek at,nodnaf f orewopehtgninrut

:serusaem

snoitacif icepsehtsehctamlocotorpehtf ik cehC

ro,retupmocf o

ro,elbacnoitcennocehtecalpeR

ehtmorf noitidnocnoitacinummocehtk cehC

)ref f inS:rotinomdednemmoceR(.rotinomenilno

F220ot0220 evitcef edsitsohehtmorf tnesatadlocotorP

F520ot0520 aelihwylbicrof noitacinummocehtstcennocsidtsoH

dehsilbatsesinoitcennoc

F620ot0620 noitacinummocelihwnoitacinummocdeliaf ecivedehT

derref snartsiatadtuoemit

FFF4ot0001 rorremetsysnoitcennocnoitacinummoC

FFF7ot0005 rorrelanretnimetsysnoitacinummoC


FF11ot0011 .deif icepstonsisserddarevresPTMS .sserddarevresPTMSehtyf icepS

FF21ot0021 .dnuof tonsirevresPTMS

gnittessserddastirof revresTPMSehtk cehC ,gnittes,sutatsstirof tsohrevresTPMSehtdna

.noitcennocdna

FFA1ot0031 revresTPMSro,locotorpderongirevresTPMS.dnopsertonseod

FFB1ot00B1 gnitanimretehtderongirevresTPMS

.gnissecorp



5-6

(3) USB interface

nnnn: Error code

Table 5-4 USB Warning List

W I N T E R F A C E - U S n n n n


FF40ot0030 yromemlanretnif ok caL ybrorresihtmorf derevocertonsiecivedehtf I

gniwollof ehtek at,nodnaf f orewopehtgninrut

:serusaem

snoitacif icepsehtsehctamlocotorpehtf ik cehC

ro,retupmocf o

ro,elbacnoitcennocehtecalpeR

ehtmorf noitidnocnoitacinummocehtk cehC

.rotinomenilno

FF42ot0012 evitcef edsitsohehtmorf tnesatadlocotorP

FF10ot0010 noitacinummocelihwnoitacinummocdeliaf ecivedehT

derref snartsiatadtuoemit

FFF1ot0001 rorremetsysnoitcennocnoitacinummoC

FFF2ot0002 rorrelanretnimetsysnoitacinummoC

5.4.2 PDL Warning

A communication error message appears if any communication error occurs between the

computer and the device. When a PLD error occurs, you can return the LP-1010 to the normal

operation from the screen shown below.

Note: The PDL warning appears on the LCD, but it disappears when the next

operation is performed. Consequently, you may not recognize the that error

occurred. It is recommended that the "ERROR MEMO" of "DRAWING

PARAM." in the setup menu be turned on, so that the error message is

printed on the drawing.

nnnn: Error code

Table 5-5 PDL Warning List(1 / 2)

W D A T A n n n n

Errorcode

Printed error memo title Description Measure

0201 W COMMAND ERROR HP-GL or HP-GL/2 command not

supported was received.

Correct erroneous part at the

computer side.

0202 W # OF PARAM. ERROR The number of parameters of HP-GL

or HP-GL/2 command is wrong.

0203 W PARAM._RANGE_ERR

The plotting instruction that exceeds

the range supported by HP-GL or HP-

GL/2 command, or the plotting

instruction that uses illegal characterswas received.



5-7


Table 5-5 PDL Warning List

(2 / 2)

rorrEedoc

eltitomemrorredetnirP noitpircseD erusaeM

5020 DNAMMOCDENIFEDNUW

roLG-PHf onoitcurtsnitesretcarahC

detroppustondnammoc2 / LG-PH.deviecersaw

ehttatrapsuoenorretcerroC

.edisretupmoc

7020 RRE_RFFB_NOGYLOPW rorrewolf revoref f ubnogyloP

.derrucco


ref f ubnogyloP(.edisretupmoc

)stniop006601:timilreppu

8020 )omemrorreoN(—

onsierehtesuaceb,derongisiataD

-PHnistsixeatadgnittolpevitcef f e

.dnammocLG

f iedisretupmocehtk cehC

siatadgnittolpevitcef f e

.derref snart

9020 WOLFREVO_.RAHCW

rof yromemniaeraytpmeonsierehT

LG-PHf osretcarahcderetsigerresu

.)dnammocCU / LD(

ehtecuderotsaostcerroC

ybatadrosnoitartsigerf orebmun

.retcarahceno

0030 WOLFREVONRETTAPW

nrettapynamooteraerehT

ehtdnagniwardenonisnoitartsiger.swolf revoyromemnrettap

nisnoitartsigernrettapehtecudeR

.gniwardeno

1030 WOLFREVOHCTAHW

hctahynamooteraerehT

ehtdnagniwardenonisnoitartsiger

.swolf revoyromemnrettap

nisnoitartsigerhctahehtecudeR

.gniwardeno

3030 WOLFREVO_.RAHCW rof yromemniaeraytpmeonsierehT

.LG-PHf osretcarahcderetsigerresu

ehtecuderotsaostcerroC

ybatadrosnoitartsigerf orebmun

.retcarahceno

5030 WOLFREVOLOOPSW .swolf revoyromemloopsehT

yf icepsro,DDHlanoitpollatsnI

ehtf iFFO=GNIRETNECeht

ehthtiwdesusiecived

.NO=GNIRETNEC

6030 WOLFREVONOGYLOPW rorrewolf revoref f ubnogyloP

.derrucco

ehttatrapsuoenorretcerroCref f ubnogyloP(.edisretupmoc

)stniop006601:timilreppu

ot7030

3130

ot703RRELDPW

313RRELDPW gninrawmargorP

ehtdnaelbicudorpersirorreehtf I

tsumerawtf oseht,roopsitlusertnirp

.noisrevtsetalehtotdedargpueb

4130 DERONGIATADW onsierehtesuaceb,derongisiataD

.atadgnittolpevitcef f e

evitcef f ef iedisretupmocehtk cehC

.derref snartsiatadgnittolp

0040 RRE_EDOCED_RETSARW retsardesserpmocehtf otamrof ehT

.suoenorresiatad

ehtf iedisretupmocehtk cehC

retsardesserpmocehtf otamrof

.tcerrocsiatad

1040 RRE_TAMROF_RETSARW ezisehtf oatadretsaronsierehT

.atadehtybdeif iceps

siatadf iedisretupmocehtk cehC

.tcerroc

ot0050

5050 )omemrorreoN(— gninrawmargorP

ehtdnaelbicudorpersirorreehtf I

tsumerawtf oseht,roopsitlusertnirp

.noisrevtsetalehtotdedargpueb

0060 RORRETAMROFW

ecivedeht,rO.suoenorresiatadFFIT

f onoissimonaoteudgnittolpdeliaf

.gatlaitnesseehttatrapsuoenorretcerroC

.edisretupmoc1060 RORRE.MARAPFO#W FFITf osretemarapf orebmunehT

.gnorwsigatatad

2060 RRE_EGNAR_.MARAPW gatatadFFITf oeulavretemarapehT

.egnardetroppusehtsdeecxe


onsierehtesuaceb,derongisiataD

.atadFFITniatadgnittolpevitcef f e

evitcef f ef iedisretupmocehtk cehC

.derref snartsiatadgnittolp


T gnittolpdeliaf ecivedeh naoteud

ehtnidrocerlaitnessef onoissimo

.tamrof SLAC


.edisretupmoc



5-8

5.4.3 Engine Warning

This error occurs when image data is transferred from the controller to the engine.

When this error occurs, the image data has not been transferred to the engine correctly and,

therefore, the faulty data may be printed on the paper. Return the device to the normal operation

from the following job.

nnnn: Error code

Table 5-6 Engine Control Warning List

W E 5 6 E - n n n n


F009ot1009 rorrepihcerawdraH

)yarraetagf ororreref snartrettolp( ,devomertonsirorreehtf I.atadytluaf ehttnirpeR

tsetalehtoterawmrif ehtedargpurotrapaecalper,tnemecalperf oesacnI.ylgnidroccanoisrev

.MARDrodraobPIRehtegnahc

F109ot1109 rorrepihcerawdraH

)yarraetagf ororreref snartrennacs(

FF09ot1209 )eruliaf noitarepoyarraetag(rorrepihcerawdraH

5.4.4 Main Warning

nnnn: Error code

Table 5-7 List of Main Warnings

W F 0 6 D - n n n n

Error code Description Measure

0801 Spool file error

This error often results from abnormal power-off.

If the error does not recur as power is turned on

again, there is no problem. If the error still

recurred as power is turned on again, confirm

with the user in what situation did the error

happened. Then replace the relevant parts or

upgrade F/W to the latest version. Target part isRIP board (or, DRAM or HDD).

0838 Judgment of PDL is not available from the data

If the error occurs on a specific set of data, a

problem on the data should be suspected. If the

error occurred on a set of data with which there

has been no trouble so far in its output, confirm

with the user in what situation the error resulted.

Then replace the relevant parts or upgrade F/W to

the latest version. Target part is RIP board (or,

DRAM or HDD).



5-9


5.5 Service Call Error

Service call errors are handled by our Service Center.

Hint: When a service call error occurs, you should request the user to turn off the

device once and turn it on again to check whether the error is reproduced.

Restarting the machine may reset the error.

5.5.1 Engine Error

This error message may appear if the engine of the device is faulty.

nnnn: Error codeDescription: This error message may appear if the engine of the device is faulty.

Measure: To correct error, see Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting (Engine Error)."

5.5.2 System Error

This error message may appear if an unrecoverable and exceptional system error occurs in the

controller of the device.

Description: An unexpected hardware or program error occurs.

Measure: Hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred.

Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.

Check the hardware for connection.

Replace a part. In case of replacement, change the hard disk drive, DRAM, or

MRC2 board.

5.5.3 Controller Error

This error message may appear if an unrecoverable fatal error occurs in the module provided on

the controller of the device.

(1) Error in PDL module

nnnn: Error code

Table 5-8 PDL Module Error List

E E N G I N E n n n nP OWE R O F F / O N

E F F F F - F F F FP OWE R O F F / O N

E F 0 6 4 - n n n nP OWE R O F F / O N


0380 to 039F

Program error

If the device is not reset by turning it off once andturning it on again, hear from the user about the

situation when the error occurred, and replace a

part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version

accordingly. In case of replacement, change the

MRC2 board or DRAM.0A80 to 0A90



5-10

(4) Error in Main module

nnnn: Error code

(3) Error in Operation module

nnnn: Error code

Table 5-10 Operation Module Error List

(2) Error in Engine Control module

nnnn: Error code

Table 5-9 Engine Control Module Error List

E E 5 6 E - n n n nP OWE R O F F / O N

E E F 7 0 - n n n nP OWE R O F F / O N


1010 )rorreezinorhcnystoobk sat(rorremargorPdnaecnof f otigninrutybtesertonsiecivedehtf I

ehttuobaresuehtmorf raeh,niaganotigninrut

aecalperdna,derruccororreehtnehwnoitautis

noisrevtsetalehtoterawmrif ehtedargpurotrapehtegnahc,tnemecalperf oesacnI.ylgnidrocca

.MARDrodraob2CRMFFF1ot0001 rorremargorP


0111 to 01FF Program error (task boot error)

If the device is not reset by turning it off once and

turning it on again, hear from the user about the




MRC2 board or DRAM.

0201 to 02FF Program error (task-to-task communication error)

1000 to 1FFF Program error

0301 to 03FF Hardware chip error (gate array error)

0501 - 05FF Engine communication error

0601 - 06FF Scanner communication error

0401 to 04FF Hard disk error






hard disk drive or optional board (or MRC2 board

or DRAM).

E F 0 6 D - n n n nP OWE R O F F / O N



5-11


(5) Error in Setup module

nnnn: Error code

Table 5-12 Setup Error List

Table 5-11 Main Module Error List

E F 3 7 5 - n n n nP OWE R O F F / O N


0101 Program error (task boot synchronize error) If the device is not reset by turning it off once and



part or upgrade the firmware to the latest versionaccordingly. In case of replacement, change the

MRC2 board or DRAM.

0111 to 01FF Program error (task boot error)

0201 to 02FF Program error (task-to-task communication error)

1000 to 1FFF Program error

0301 to 03FF NVRAM error






MRC2 board or DRAM.

0401 to 04FF Hard disk / RAM disk error

-

-

-

-



situation when theerror occurred, andupgradethe

firmware to the latest version accordingly.

Alternatively, check the power supply and datacable that are connected to the hard disk drive.

If wrong connection is found, correct it.

Check thepower supplyand data cable, whichare

connected to the hard disk drive, for damage. If

either or both parts are damaged, replace it/them.

In case of replacement, the hard disk drive,

optional board, change DRAM or MRC2 board.

2000 to 2FFF Hardware configuration error

This error is attributable to incorrectly configured

hardware: for example, the standard panel is not

installed. Therefore, check the configuration and,

if troubles are found, replace a component or

upgrade the firmware to the latest version

accordingly. In case of replacement, change thepanel, NVRAM, or MRC2 board.


1010 )rorreezinorhcnystoobk sat(rorremargorPdnaecnof f otigninrutybtesertonsiecivedehtf I



noisrevtsetalehtoterawmrif ehtedargpurotrap

ehtegnahc,tnemecalperf oesacnI.ylgnidrocca

.MARDrodraob2CRMFFF1ot0001 rorremargorP

FF30ot1030 rorreMARVN

dnaecnof f otigninrutybtesertonsiecivedehtf I





.MARDrodraob2CRM

FF40ot1040 rorreelif lortnocputeS

dnaecnof f otigninrutybtesertonsiecivedehtf Iehttuobaresuehtmorf raeh,niaganotigninrut




.MARDrodraob2CRM



5-13


5.6 Error Log

Each time an error or warning occurs in the device, it is displayed on the LCD and also the error

log information is saved in the internal memory.The error log information saved in the internal memory includes additionally the time when an

error occurred, and therefore you can confirm the error log using the "ERROR PRINT" of the

function menu.

(This information is saved even after the power was turned off.)

5.6.1 Classification of Error/Warning

The type of error/warning is classified as follows:

1 Classification: E (Service Call) An unrecoverable error that needs service person's

measures.

2 Classification: O (Operator Call) An error that the operator can take measures.

3 Classification: W (Warning) A warning, such as expiration of service life of

consumables and data error occurred.

5.6.2 Format of Message

Each error/warning message to be logged if an error or warning occurs identifies one character (+

space) at the top the of message as the error/warning identifier.

The log message is composed of alphanumerics and thus it does not necessarily match the

message displayed on the LCD.

The error/warning message registered as log information is prepared in the format mentioned

below.

5.6.3 Log Registration Format

An error or warning displayed on the LCD is registered as log information in the following

format.

Case 1 "yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a bbbb-cccc"

Case 2 "yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a ssssssss cccc"

Case 3 "yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a ssssssss"

yyyy/mm/dd year/month/day

hh:mm:ss hour:minute:second

a Error/warning identifier (common to LCD display)

bbbb- Error classification (hexadecimal notation)

cccc Error code (hexadecimal notation may be omitted)

ssssssss Optional alphanumeric message (may be omitted)

*Log example

"2004/05/24 12:31:55 E ENGINE 2030" Error number:2030=Power supply failure



5-14

5.6.4 Error Log Print Item

Table 5-15 Error Log Print Item

Header information Print item

Log media

Type of log media (log storage position)

HDD : Hard disk drive

FLASH : Flash memory

Max log number

Number of registrable logs

HDD : 8191

FLASH :1023

Log size Log size per information: 16 bytes

Log set count Number of registered logs

Error information Print item

Log Storage position (1 to 8191)

Date Error generation date (D/M/Y)

Time Error generation time

Information

Error message:

E sssssss E: Fatal error (service call error)

W sssssss W: Warning error

O sssssss O: Operator intervention error

5.6.5 Type of Error Log

The errors are classified as follows.

The following log examples show the information saved in the log file.

(1) Service Call Error (Classification: E)

Description: An unrecoverable error that needs service person's measures.

Cause: Hardware or firmware is faulty.

Measure: If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, replace

the hardware or firmware.

*Log example of hard disc error

"E E56E-0401"

(2) Operator Call (Classification: O)

Description: An error that the operator can take measures.

Cause: No paper, no toner or paper jams, which needs operator's help.

Measure: Remove the cause to restore the device to its normal state.

*Log example of door open

"O DOOR2 open"



5-15


(3) Warning (Classification: W)

Description: A warning state such as expiration of service life of consumables and data error

occurred.

Cause: A consumable approaches its life, or any failure in the environment, settings, or

data occurred.

Measure: Take appropriate measures to remove the cause.

(Service person may partially participate in the measure process.)

*Log example of comand warning

"W DATA 0201"



5-16

5.7 Error Log Classification List

Table 5-16 Error Log Classification List

egasseM noitacifissalC noitpircseD erusaeM

(xxxxxxxxE rorrE ) rorrellacecivreS sdeenrorreelbarevocernunA

.serusaems'nosrepecivres

morf derevocertonsiecivedehtf I

rewopehtgninrutretf arorresiht

tuobaresuehtmorf raeh,nodnaf f o

rorreehtnehwnoitautiseht

erawmrif ehtedargpudna,derrucco

aecalperronoisrevtsetalehtot

.ylgnidroccatraptnaveler

xxxxxxxxO

( )llaCrotarepO

llacrotarepO nacrotarepoehttahtrorrenA

.serusaemek at

erotserotesuacehtevomeR

.etatslamronstiotecivedeht

ehtotgnidroccaserusaemek aT

ehtnodeyalpsidegassemecnadiug

.DCL

xxxxxxxxW)gninraW(

gninraW stisehcaorppaelbamusnocAehtniytluaf ro,ef il

atadro,sgnittes,tnemnorivne

.detcetedsaw

.eruliaf f oesuacehtevomeRyllaitrapyamnosrepecivresehT(

).ssecorperusaemehtnietapicitrap



5-17


5.8 Job Log

When the device executes a job (i.e. print), a job log is saved in the internal memory. Various

types of information, including execution time, are registered in this job log. You can review the job log history from "PRINT JOB LOG" of the function menu.

(The job log information is saved even after the power was turned off.)

Total count and distance, both of which are updated whenever a new job is executed, are

registered in this job log as well.

5.8.1 Job Log Print Item

Table 5-17 Job Log Print Item

(1 / 2)

Header information Print item

Log media

Type of log media (log storage position)

HDD : Hard disk driveFLASH : Flash memory

Max log number

Number of registrable logs

HDD : 65535FLASH : 1023

Log size Log size per information: 128 bytes

Log set count Number of registered logs

Job information Print item

LogLog file storage position (1 to 65535) (4 digits)

Shows the job history number assigned to the job in execution order.

Job

Job number (1 to 999) (3 digits)

When the system recognizes the generation of job, the job number is assigned to the job.

Req Job generation (spool) number (1 to 999) (3 digits)

PDL

Processing PDL (5 characters)

A processing PDL is prepared for every data format

HPGL/TIFF/CALS/COPY/SCAN

PortProtocol / port number (4 characters)Fxx (FTP), Lxx (LPR), Xxx (XPT), PARA, USB?

xx: Port number (1 to 10)

IP-addressIP address (10 characters)

When the protocol is USB and parallel jobs are executed, the IP address is not defined.

FileFile name (12 characters)

Displays the file name that the host reported as printer job.

UserUser name (12 characters)

Displays the user name that the host reported as printer job.

Input Size

Receive data size (5 characters)

This information shows the received data size (amount). Byte, kilobyte, and megabyte are

used as unit.



5-18

Table 5-17 Job Log Print Item

(2 / 2)

Job information Print item

Output PageNumber of print job (3 characters)

This information shows the number of sheets printed in one job, regardless of

drawing size.

Output Acc

Number of output sheets converted into A4/A3 paper (3 characters)

This information shows the number of output sheets converted into A4/A3 paper

based on the value indicated by Output Page.

(A3/A4 = 1, A2 = 2, A1 = 3, A0 = 5)

Date

Receive date

This information shows the date in the format of xx (month) and xx (day). Only

figures are displayed.

Job Start

Job start time (receive start time)

This information shows the job execution start time in the format of xx (hour) xx

(minute) xx (second). (The date (D/M/Y) is not displayed.)

In case of reprint or additional print, the start time of the new job is displayed

here.

Job End

Job end time

This information shows the print end time in the format of xx (hour) xx (minute)

xx (second). (The date (D/M/Y) is not displayed.)

Counter Acc*10

Total counter (number of sheets converted into A4/A3 paper) (unit: 10 sheets)

This counter shows the total number of printed sheets that will be updated

whenever a new job is executed. "1234" means 12340 sheets.

Counter Run*10

Total distance (unit: 10 m)

This counter shows the total print distance that will be updated whenever a new

job is executed. "1234" means 12340 meters.

Result

Job execution result (status)

This information shows the execution result of a job.

Only after the job is normally ended, the number in Counter Acc*10 is updated.

When a recovery process is executed, NORMAL is displayed as status and the

counter is ready.

NORMAL : Normally terminated.

DELETE : Data is discarded.

CANCEL : Print (job) is canceled.ERxxxx : Error end. (xxxx: Error log storage position)

EXTRA : Additional print

AGAIN : Reprint



5-19


5.9 Replacement of PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (Main Control Board)

After the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (main control board) is replaced, the following operations are

needed. Be sure to transfer the EEPROM from the old board to the new board. (except where theEEPROM is faulty).

Procedures:

1 Enter the serial number of the device.

Access "DEVICE SERIAL NO." of the "SYSTEM" menu and enter the serial number of the

device. Also, perform the operation for the serial number unset. (See "5.10 Serial Number

Unset".)

2 Perform the install operations and set of IP address. (Refer to the user's guide.)

3 Reset the each setting value on the other PCB - ASSY - MRC2.

Note: EEPROM contains important information such as counter. Pay close

attention not to break its legs or mount the element upside down during

removal and installation.



5-20

5.10 Serial Number Unset

After powering on, the device self-tests the area in which its serial number has been saved (flash

memory). If it is proved that the area is damaged or is not initialized, the following messageappears on the LCD.

The message appears when the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (main control board) is replaced with an

uninitialized board.

When this message appears, you must enter the maintenance person mode and enter the serial

number.

Measure: Enter the device serial number using the following procedures.



3 Enter the serial number of the device.

4 Press the key.

E S E T T H E S / N

E S E T T H E S / N

P A S SW O R DI N P U T MO D E

I N P U T O KL E V E L 0 0 3

S E R I A L N UM B E R* 0 0 0 0 0



6-1

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)


This chapter describes the troubleshooting if a failure occurs in the engine.

If a message as shown below is displayed on the LCD of the control panel, take a corrective

measure following an error code "nnnn" of the error message. For other troubles, take a

corrective measure according to the symptom.

6.1 How to Read This Manual

6.1.1 Overview of Engine Troubleshooting

When troubleshooting the engine, first perform the level-1 troubleshooting to classify the

trouble. Then, advance the troubleshooting by performing the level-2 troubleshooting.

When you try to find a cause of the trouble through the troubleshooting or on the check-chart,

read the procedure carefully to avoid a failure. Also, if multiple causes are supposed, it is difficult

to find all causes at a time, and therefore you may have to perform the troubleshooting of the

same title again. In such a case, even for the same troubleshooting, ongoing judgment may

change, thus requiring extreme care.

Level-1 troubleshooting

The level-1 troubleshooting is the first step of troubleshooting. The level-1 troubleshooting

clarifies whether an error code or other trouble symptom is present or not to provide a hint for

proceeding to the level-2 troubleshooting.

Level-2 troubleshooting

The level-2 troubleshooting provides the classified troubleshooting procedures according to theerror code, paper jam, and other various symptoms. As a trouble diagnostic method, a cause of

the trouble can be found in a short time by performing the procedure given by the troubleshooting

or on the check-chart.

Error code

E E N G I N E n n n nP O W E R O F F / O N



6-2

Error code : If an error code indicating an engine trouble is displayed on the

LCD, refer to the error description, resetting method, and corre-

sponding troubleshooting item from the error code list to per-

form the troubleshooting.

Paper jam : If a paper jam occurs frequently, refer to the description of the

paper jam code list to perform the paper jam troubleshooting.

Other symptoms : If an error code is not displayed or any trouble other than paper

jam occurs, judge an engine block concerned from the symptom

to perform the troubleshooting.

Maintenance diagnostic mode

This device provides various self-diagnostic functions to check or test the condition of each part

of the engine. These self-diagnostic functions are executed during the level-2 troubleshooting in

the engine maintenance mode.

For each function and its operating procedure in the engine maintenance mode, see Section 2.

6.1.2 Terminology

The terms listed below are frequently used in the engine troubleshooting. Before performing the

trouble analysis, understand the meaning of these terms.

Common terms

Error code : "nnnn" of an error message "E ENGINE nnnn" displayed on the

LCD of the control panel if the engine finds a trouble is called

the error code.

Visual check : Check visually the operation of parts such as a relay and me-

chanical linkage to find any faulty.

Enter maintenance Enter the engine maintenance mode (see Section 2.1.1). Then,

code 03: select the maintenance code <03> and press the key.

Turn on power : Turn on the Power switch.

Turn off power : Turn off the Power switch.

Check for a short : Turn off the Power switch. Measure resistance between pin and

frame in the ohm range of the tester.



6-3


Select a subcode : Enter the engine maintenance mode following the procedure

given in "2.1.1 How to Enter the Engine Maintenance Mode,"

and select the maintenance code <03>. Then, select a subcode

"nn" and press the key.

"On" display ("Off" display) : This means that the maintenance code <06> is activated and a

subcode is selected, and then the signal level inputted to the

LCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) is displayed on the

LCD. "On" or "Off" is displayed.

Exit from trouble analysis procedure

Mechanical trouble : This term is used when you shift to mechanical adjustment or

part replacement. Read all items (main causes are described) forcomparison with a symptom appearing in the machine to find a

cause of the trouble.

Replace one after another : If a trouble is no longer analyzed, this device uses a method in

which a part is replaced one after another. The parts to be re-

placed are listed in the order having high replacement frequency

and high probability of trouble.



6-4

6.2 Leve-1 Troubleshooting

The level-1 troubleshooting sorts the troubles.

If "E ENGINE nnnn" is displayed on the LCD of the control panel, perform the troubleshootingfollowing this unrecoverable error code (see Section 6.3.1).

If a paper jam occurs frequently, enter the engine maintenance mode to check the paper jam

situations and perform the troubleshooting (see Section 6.3.2).

For other cases, make judgment from the symptom and perform the troubleshooting (see

Section 6.3.3).

6.2.1 Unrecoverable Error Codes and Description


(1 / 2)elbarevocernU

sedocrorre noitpircseD

0202 elbuort)rotomgnitarbivelttobrenotretsaw(10MB

2202,1202 elbuort)rotomesluprellortaeh(10MH

3202 elbuort)rotomssecorp(10MP

A202,4202 elbuort)rotomesluprepoleved(10MG

B202,6202 elbuort)rotomeslupdeef repap(10MT

C202,7202 elbuort)1rotomeslupdeef repap(10MF

D202,8202 elbuort)2rotomeslupdeef repap(20MF

E202,9202 elbuort)3rotomeslupdeef repap(30MF

0302 )ytluaf sieulavnoitaulavezH06 / zH05(eruliaf ylppusrewoP

2302 )tuptuoegatlovhgihniderruccodaolrevo(eruliaf ylppusrewopegatlovhgiH

3302 )f f odenrutsirewopehtnehwruccotonseodtpurretni(eruliaf ylppusrewoP

5302 )tuoemit(rorreref snartatadnoitcerrocdaehDEL

6302 )rorreredaeh(rorreref snartatadnoitcerrocdaehDEL

7302 )rorreretoof (rorreref snartatadnoitcerrocdaehDEL

1802 erutarepmetresuf f otaehrevodetceted)rotsimrehtrevo(20HT

2802 eruliaf )rotsimrehtlortnocerutarepmetnoitaxif (10HT

)detrohsebdluocselbac(erutarepmethgihylemertxE

3802 pmettimilreppunoitaxif ehtdedeecxe)rotsimrehtlortnocerutarepmetnoitaxif (10HT

4802 emitdeif icepsnihtiwpmetdeif icepshcaertondid10HTerutarepmetnoitaxif ,detratspu-mrawretf A

5802 ebdluocselbac(pmethgihylemertxE.eruliaf )rotsimrehtgnirusaemerutarepmetdaehDEL(30HT

)detcennocsidebdluocselbac(pmetwolylemertxero)detrohs

6802 pmettimilreppudaehDELehtdedeecxe)rotsimrehtgnirusaemerutarepmetdaehDEL(30HT

7802 )detrohsebdluocselbac(pmethgihylemertxE.eruliaf )rotsimrehtlortnocerutarepmetnoitaxif (40HT

8802 pmettimilreppunoitaxif ehtdedeecxe)rotsimrehtlortnocerutarepmetnoitaxif (40HT

9802 emitdeif icepsnihtiwpmetdeif icepshcaertondid40HTerutarepmetnoitaxif ,detratspu-mrawretf A



6-5



(2 / 2)

elbarevocernUsedocrorre

noitpircseD

3C02ot1C02 )retemarapmetsys(rorremusk cehcMARVN

4C02 )tnemecalpertrapretf aecnatsidtnirp(rorremusk cehcMARVN

5C02 )gninaelctrapretf aecnatsidtnirp(rorremusk cehcMARVN

6C02 )retemarapenignedenif ed-resu(rorremusk cehcMARVN

8C02 )golrorreelbarevocernu(rorremusk cehcMARVN

9C02 )golrorrema jrepap(rorremusk cehcMARVN

AC02 )golnoitpmusnocegdirtracssecorp(rorremusk cehcMARVN

8D02ot1D02 )retemaraplortnocenigne(rorremusk cehcMARVN

0E02 wolf revo)remitgodhctaw(TDW

10D2 denrutersidnammocontubsemit7rellortnocehtotdettimsnartsawKAN

20D2 denrutertonsiKCAtubsemit7edamsawrellortnocehtotesnopseR

30D2 semit001nahteromdetcetedsawrorreenileht,rellortnocmorf atadgniviecernehW40D2 denrutertonsiKCAtubsemit7rellortnocehtotdecitonsawnoitisnartsutatsenignE

C7F2 )derotserebtonnacW / F(deraelcebtonnacyromemhsalf eht,derruccororregnitirwerW / Fretf A

D7F2 ebtonnacW / F(yromemhsalf ehtninettirwebnacatadon,derruccororregnitirwerW / Fretf A

)derotser

E7F2 hctamtonseodyromemhsalf ehtninettirwerW / Ff omusk cehc,derruccororregnitirwerW / Fretf A

)derotserebtonnacW / F(

F7F2 stnetnocehthctamtonseodyromemhsalf ehtninettirwerW / F,derruccororregnitirwerW / Fretf A

)derotserebtonnacW / F(MARSf o



6-6

6.2.2 Paper Jam Error Codes and Description

Table 6-2 Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes

rorrema jrepaP

sedoc

noitpircseD

0333 noitisop)rettucrednu(03SPtadetacolsirepaP




2043,1043 ylraeootsi40SPtaegdepotrepapf olavirrA

4043,3043 40SPtaevirratonseodegdepotrepaP

2943,1943 ylraeootsi40SPtalavirra,dnuowersillorrepapnehW

4943,3943 dessapemitssaprepapteserphguoht40SPnistsixerepap,dnuowersillorrepapnehW

0053 noitisop)retsiger(40SPtadetacolsirepaP

2053,1053 ylraeootsi50SPtaegdepotrepapf olavirrA4053,3053 50SPtaevirratonseodegdepotrepaP

2953,1953 ylraeoot50SPsevaelegdeliartrepaP

4953,3953 dessapemitssaprepapteserphguoht50SPevaeltonseodegdeliartrepaP

0063 noitisop)noitcus(40SPnidetacolsirepaP





0073 noitisop)resuf (70SPtadetacolsirepaP





7403ot2403 sevomedalbrettucnehwelbuorT



6-7


6.3 Leve-2 Troubleshooting

6.3.1 "Unrecoverable error code" Troubleshooting

(1) "2020" troubleshooting

This trouble occurs if the BM01 motor does not rotate.

Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (09) that corresponds to the displayed

error code to turn on the motor.

Is the motor rotating?

Y N

Is +24VDC present between CN7-1 and CN7-5 of PCB-ASSY-MEC?

Y N

Check CBL07 for a disconnection or short.

Check low voltage power unit.

Check if the load on mechanical system is large.

Check CBL03B and CBL032 for a short.

If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

(2) "2021" / "2022" / "2024" / "202A" troubleshooting

These troubles occur if the motor does not rotate or the motor rotation speed varies.

First, check if the interlock switches (INT1 and INT3) are normal.

Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (07 to 08) that corresponds to the

displayed error code to turn on the motor.


Y N


Y N




HM trouble

Check CBL05A and CBL051 for a short.

GM trouble

Check CBL05A, CBL51 and CBL052 for a short.





6-8


These troubles occur if the PM01 motor does not rotate or the motor rotation speed varies.


Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (06) that corresponds to the displayed

error code to turn on the motor.


Y N


Y N




Check CBL06A and CBL061 for a short or open circuit.

If not so, replace the motor or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

Mechanical system check

Check the clutch for operation.

Check the gear for damage or galling.

If not so, replace the motor or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).



6-9


(4) "2026" / "202B" / "2027" / "202C" "2028" / "202D" / "2029" / "202E" troubleshooting

These troubles occur if the motor does not rotate or the motor rotation speed varies.


Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (10 to13) that corresponds to the

displayed error code to turn on the motor.


Y N

Is +24VDC present between CN21-1 and CN21-2 of PCB-ASSY-RFU

(motor driver bord)?

Y N

Check CBL07 and CBL 071 for a disconnection or short.


Are other motors rotating?

Y N

Check CBL06B and CBL062 for a short or open circuit.



Check CBL06B and CBL062 for a short or open circuit.

- TM trouble

Check CBL22 for a short or open circuit.

- FM01 trouble

Check CBL23 and CBLR231 for a short or open circuit.

- FM02 trouble


- FM03 trouble


Replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor drive board) or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control

board)

Mechanical system check

Check the clutch for operation.

Check the gear for damage or galling.



6-10


Input of frequency counter pulses from the power supply is faulty.

Check CBL09B for a short or open circuit.

If not so, replace the low voltage power unit or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).


Either of CH1 to CH4 of high voltage outputs is shorted.

Turn on the CH1 to CH4 one by one to check if the discharge sound is heard or the monitor

output of high voltage power is stable so as to identify which channel is shorted.

For a monitoring method of high voltage power unit, see 9.1.

Enter the maintenance code 09 in the engine maintenance mode. Select a subcode that corresponds toeach process.

CH1 failure (subcode 01)

Check the process cartridge (Check the wire for dirtiness, presence of foreign materials,

or slack. Check the grid for dirtiness or slack.)

Check the CBL-HV1 for a short.

If so, replace respective parts.


Check the developer (Check the developer bias contact for a touch.)

Check the CBL-HV22, CBL-HV2, CBL-HV21 for a short.



Check the transfer unit (Check the wire for dirtiness, presence of foreign materials, or

slack. Check the transfer separator for a mounting state.)




Check the separator (Check the wire for dirtiness, presence of foreign materials, or

slack. Check the transfer separator for a mounting state.)



If all channels are faulty


Check CBL09B for a short or open circuit.



6-11



The running distance data may not be saved in the NVRAM on the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control

board) when the plotter was turned off in the previous job. Possible causes of this error will be low

voltage power unit, faulty PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board), or faulty CBL09.

Turn off the plotter once, and after several seconds, turn it on again.

Does 2033 error occur?

Y N

Check if the running distance is correct, and if OK, the plotter is normal.

NG, go to the next step.

Referring to Appendix A.2.1 (4), check the LED indication on the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control

board) when the power is turned off.

Are LED 4 to 8 on PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) turned on?

Y N

Replace lower voltage power unit.

Check the CBL09 for a short or open circuit.

Check the 5 V of PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).


(8) "2035" / "2036" / "2037" troubleshooting

These troubles will occur when the "config" (writing of correction data) for the LED head was not

executed normally.

Is +5VDC present between CN4 (CN5)-1 and CN4 (CN5)-4 of LED head?

Y N

Check the CBL13 and CBL121 for a disconnection or short.

Check the low voltage power supply.

If not so, replace the LED head.

Check the CBL08

If not so, replace the LED head or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).



6-12


Check the TH01 (fuser control thermistor) for a mounting state (such as disconnected connector,

remaining paper chips, floating and bent TH01).

Check the TH01 contact surface with the heat roller for dirtiness. Clean as necessary.

Check the TH01 for an open circuit.

If so, replace the TH01.

Check the CBL45 and CBL04B for a short.

Check the TH02 (overheat thermistor) for a short (trouble if resistance value of thermistor is less

than 1k .

Check the CBL04B and CBL045 for a short.


If the trouble is not removed, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

(10) "2082" / "2087" troubleshooting

Check the TH01 and TH04 (fuser control thermistor) for a short (trouble if resistance value of

thermistor is less than 1k .





Check respective fans for operation one by one.

Check the BL02 (fuser fan) and BL06 (fuser A3 fan) for operation.

Does each fan operate normally?

Y N

Replace faulty fan.

Check the TH01 and TH04 (fuser control thermistor) for a short. Check the TH01 and TH04.

If so, replace TH01 or TH04.

Check the CBL04B and CBL045.

Check the ozone filter for clogging.

If clogged, replace the ozone filter.

Note: Check that the halogen lamp turns on and off repeatedly at a several

second interval.



6-13



Check if the halogen lamp (fuser lamp) turns on.

- Before checking the halogen lamp on/off operation, make sure that fuser unittemperature has dropped sufficiently.

Note: After the halogen lamp was checked for its lighting, immediately turn off the

halogen lamp (turn off the power switch or open the cover).

Does the halogen lamp turn on?

Y N

Check the THM (thermal fuse) for continuity.

Is the fuse continuous?Y N

Replace the Thermal Fuse Assy.

*After the fuse was replaced, execute again "2084" troubleshooting.

Check the FL01 and FL02 (lamp) for continuity.

Is the lamp continuous?

Y N

Replace the halogen lamp which is not continuous.

Check the CBL17, CBL171 and CBL- HTR for an open circuit.


If the trouble is not removed, replace the low voltage current or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine

control board).

Check the TH01 and TH04 (fuser control thermistor) and the TH02 (overheat thermistor) for a

mounting state (such as disconnected connector, remaining paper chips, floating and bent TH01,

TH02, or TH04).

Check the contact surface of TH01, TH02, and TH04 with the heat roller for dirtiness.

Clean as necessary.

Check the TH01, TH02 and TH04 for a short or open circuit.

If so, replace TH01, TH02 and TH04.



WARNING



6-14


Check the TH03 (LED head thermistor) for a short (trouble if resistance value of thermistor is

less than 1k Ω.

If so, replace the LED head.




Check respective fans for operation one by one.

Check the BL01 (suction fan) BL02 (fuser fan) and BL06 (fuser A3 fan) for operation.

Does each fan operate normally?

Y NReplace faulty fan.

Check the TH03 (LED head thermistor) for a short.

Check the TH03.

If so, replace the LED head.


Check the ozone filter for clogging.

If clogged, replace the ozone filter.

(15) "20C1 to 20CA" / "20D1 to 20D8" / "20E0" troubleshooting


(16) "2D01 to 2D04" troubleshooting

Check the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (controller board).


If so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (engine control board).

(17) "2F7C to 2F7F" troubleshooting




6-15


6.3.2 "Paper jam error code" Troubleshooting

(1) Power ON jam checkout procedure

This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble for which a paper jam error message is

displayed on the LCD before printing.

Note: When two or more doors are displayed on the LCD, check the sensors that

correspond to all doors.

Example:

If the specified door is one If the specified doors are two or more

1 Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode, and check corresponding

sensors listed below from respective subcodes for each target door involved in paper jam.

O P E N D O O R XR E MO V E P A P E R

O P E N D O O R X , XR E MO V E P A P E R

Paper jamtarget door

Mainte-nancecode

Sensor Items to be checked

"Door 1" or

"Door 2" or

"Door 3"

PS30

(A0 paper size sensor)

- Light enters the sensor.

- CBL28-PS30 short (GND)

- CBL28-PS30 loose connector or disconnection (open)

- Sensor failure

PS31

(A1 paper jam4 sensor)

- Light enters the sensor.- CBL28-PS31 short (GND)


- Sensor failure

PS32

(A2 paper size sensor)




- Sensor failure

PS04

(paper size sensor)




- Sensor failure

"Door 4" or

"Door 5"

PS05

(paper registration

sensor)

- Light enters the sensor.- CBL04A-CBL041-CBL044-PS05 short (GND)

- CBL04A-CBL041-CBL044-PS05 loose connector or

disconnection (open)

- Sensor failure

"Door 6"

PS06

(suction jam sensor)


- CBL04A-CBL041-CBL043-PS06 short (GND)

- CBL04A-CBL041-CBL043-PS06 loose connector or

disconnection (open)

- Sensor failure

PS07

(fuser jam sensor)


- CBL04B-CBL045-CBL (PS07) short (GND)

- CBL04B-CBL045-CBL (PS07) loose connector or

disconnection (open)- Sensor failure



6-16

2 Replace the sensor, and when the sensor is kept on even if each sensor code is entered, replace

the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

The sensor itself goes low when the light is intercepted.

(2) "Frequent paper jam" troubleshooting

This troubleshooting is used to guide which paper jam troubleshooting is to be executed

according to the paper jam situations.

Note: Turn off the power switch and check that no paper remains in the machine.

Turn on the power switch. Is the paper jam door displayed on LCD?

Y N

Perform the "frequent paper jam" troubleshooting.Enter the maintenance code 05 in the engine maintenance mode. Check the last ten jam

codes displayed on the LCD. At this time, perform the troubleshooting one by one, starting

from the code that occurred most frequently.

Jam code "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting

Jam code "3401" / "3402" troubleshooting
















Jam code "37A1" / "37A2" troubleshooting






Perform the "Power ON jam checkout procedure."



6-17


(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" / troubleshooting

Check if paper chips or foreign materials remain in the cutter unit.

Check if wrong type of paper is used.

Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 17 or 18 to sense

RE01 or RE02 (cutter left or right home position switch).

Is the ON ⇔ OFF display changed?

Y N

Check the CBL27 and CBL62 for a short or open circuit.

If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board) or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine

control board), next, replace the cutter unit (RE01, RE02 faulty) in the following order.

Check the cutter blade stop position relative to the RE01 and RE02.

If the position is inadequate, replace the cutter unit.

If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board) or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control

board).

(4) Jam code "3401" / "3402" troubleshooting

Roll 1, Roll 2, or Roll 3 paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too early after start.

Check the paper or paper flange for setting.

Check the paper feed roller surfaces for dirtiness or presence of foreign materials.

Check the leading edge of the paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.).

In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to

check the cutter home position and cutter motion.

Is PS04 mounted correctly? (PS04 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)

Y N

If so, replace the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4).

Check the paper path up to the PS04.



6-18


Roll 1, Roll 2, or Roll 3 paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too lately after start.

Check the paper for setting or if paper chips remains in the PS04.

Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.).



Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 04 to sense PS04

(paper jam sensor 4).


Y N


Check the PS04 for setting failure or faulty lever shape.

If not so, replace the PS04.

Select the code "121" to rotate clockwise the FM01, FM02, and FM03 (main motors).

Do the FM01, FM02, and FM03 rotate clockwise? (Do the chains move clockwise?)

Y N

Execute "2021" troubleshooting fi see Section 6.3.1 (2)


Check the pinch roller for pressure.


At the paper rewinding, the top edge of paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too early.






Y N

If so, replace the PS04.

Check the paper path from PS04 up to PS05 (paper registration sensor).



6-19



At the paper rewinding, the top edge of paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too slow.


Check the paper for setting or if paper chips remain in the PS04.





(paper jam sensor 4).


Y N

Check the CBL28 for short.



Select the code "121" to rotate clockwise the FM01, FM02, and FM03 (main motors).

Do the FM01, FM02, and FM03 rotate clockwise? (Do the chains move clockwise?)

Y N

Execute “2021” troubleshooting⇒ see Section 6.3.1 (2)



The top edge of paper reached to the PS05 (registration sensor) too early.


Check the leading edge of the paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.).



Check the paper feed roller surfaces for dirtiness or presence of foreign materials.


Y N





6-20


The top edge of paper reached the PS05 (paper registration sensor) too slow.




Y N

Check the CBL04,CBL041 and CBL044 for a short.


If the trouble is not removed, replace the PS05.

Check the paper path up to the PS04 from PS05.

When the jammed paper remains in the cutter, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047"

troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion.



The bottom edge of paper passed the PS05 (paper registration sensor) too early.




Check the registration roller surfaces for dirtiness or presence of foreign materials.


Y N




Measure the paper length (Is the cut length short?)

Y N

Check the paper feed for load.

Check the motor TM01 (try to replace the motor).



6-21



The bottom edge of paper passed the PS05 (paper registration sensor) too slow.





Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 05, Check the PS05.


Y N

Check the CBL04A, CBL041 and CBL044 for a short.



Check the operation for CL04 (clutch (registration))

Check the paper pass for over PS05.


Check the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board)→ Motor FG signal does not come→ Paper

cut length becomes long.


The paper reached the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too early.




Is PS06 mounted and shape correctly? (PS06 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)

Y N


Check the CL04 (registration clutch) for operation and for ON/OFF synchronization with the

registration roller.

If so, check the LC04 for a mounting clearance.



6-22


The top edge of paper reached the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too slow.





Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 06, sense to PS06.


Y N



If so, persists, replace the PS06.

A mechanical trouble has occurred. Check the paper path.

Check the paper for running condition and shape of leading edge.

Check the belts for elongation.

Check if the paper floats up by air bleeding.

Check if the paper floats up by getting stuck to the separating finger (OPC).

Check if the paper is separated from the drum correctly.

Check the BL01 for operation.

Check the ozone filter (for lifetime).


The bottom edge of paper passed the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too early.




Is PS06 mounted and shape correctly? (PS06 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)

Y N


Check the paper for running condition or for floating up by wrinkle or slack.

Check the paper for floating up due to a paper separation failure from the drum.

Check if the paper floats up by air bleeding.


Check the ozone filter (for lifetime).

Measure the paper length (Is the cut length short?)

Y N

Check the paper feed for load.

Check the motor TM01 (try to replace the motor).



6-23



The bottom edge of paper passed the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too slow.







Y N




Check the paper pass to PS07.

Check if the paper feed fault by air bleeding.

Check the fuser drive mechanism (for looseness of gears and sprockets).

Check the BL01 for operation (A4 size).

Check the ozone filter (A4 size).

Check the air bleeding (A4 size).


The bottom paper passed the PS07 (suction jam sensor) too early.




Is PS07 mounted and shape correctly? (PS07setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)

Y N


Check the paper path.

Check the PS07 for malfunction due to external light.

Check the fuser drive mechanism (for looseness of gears and sprockets).



6-24


The top edge of paper reached the PS07 (fuser jam sensor) too slow.






Y N

Check the CBL04A, CBL045 and CBL(PS07) for a short.




Check if the paper feed fault by air bleeding.

Check the fuser drive mechanism.

Check the paper for deformation by getting stuck to the separation finger (fuser, IN).

Check if the paper is separated from the heat roller correctly.


Check the ozone filter.


The bottom paper passed the PS07 (fuser jam sensor) too early.




Is PS07 mounted and shape correctly? (PS07setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)

Y N


Check the PS07 for malfunction due to external light.

Check the fuser drive mechanism.

Check the paper path.

(Check the paper guide in the vicinity of PS07 for shape, curve, or warp (clearance of path).



6-25



The bottom edge of paper passed the PS07 (fuser jam sensor) too slow.







Y N

Check the CBL04B, CBL045 and CBL(PS07) for a short.






6-26

6.3.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

(1) "Door open check" troubleshooting

This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a "Door open check" is displayed on the

LCD of the control panel and the print is disabled though the doors and covers are closed.

Perform the troubleshooting that corresponds to the following 1 to 4 displayed on the LCD.

1 Troubleshooting of "CLOSE DOOR 5" display

- If INT3 turns on and the plotter is normal, the plotter executes the initialization

that returns the cutter to the home position. To avoid this, never touch the

INT3.

Open the cutter door (Door 5). The INT3 (cutter door interlock switch) turns on.

Does "CLOSE DOOR 5" display disappear?

Y N

Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 21.

Is "On" displayed?

Y N

Check the INT 3.

Contacts in signal system of INT3 may be faulty.

CBL03A, CBL031, or CBL14 may be disconnected or connected loosely.


Check the INT 3 for its mounting state.

Check the actuator for a breakage or bending.

Check mechanical parts.


CAUTION



6-27



Note: Execute the troubleshooting of 4 first.

- If PS21 turns on and the plotter is normal, the plotter executes the initialization.To avoid this, never touch the PS21.

Check the PS21.

Contacts in signal system of PS21 may be faulty, or PS21 itself may be faulty.

CBL23, CBLR231, or ROLL1CN connector may be disconnected or connected loosely.

If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board).


- If PS22 turns on and the plotter is normal, the plotter executes the initialization.

To avoid this, never touch the PS22.

Check the PS22.

Contacts in signal system of PS22 may be faulty, or PS22 itself may be faulty.

CBL24, CBLR241, or ROLL2CN connector may be disconnected or connected loosely.

If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board).

CAUTION

CAUTION



6-28

(2) "SET CARTRIDGE & PULL LEVER TO RIGHT" troubleshooting

This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a message concerning the toner refilling is

displayed and the print is disabled though the toner was refilled.

Perform the troubleshooting that corresponds to the following 1 and 2 displayed on the LCD.

1 Troubleshooting of "SET CARTRIDGE & PULL LEVER TO RIGHT" display

Set the toner cartridge and pull the lever to the right.

Does "SET CARTRIDGE & PULL LEVER TO RIGHT" display on LCD disappear?

Y N


Is the "ON " displayed ?

Y N

Check the MS04 (toner door open-close switch).

Contacts of MS04 may be faulty.



Check the MS04 for its mounting state.

Check the toner cartridge for deformation or any fault.

Check if the toner cartridge is set correctly.




6-29


2 Troubleshooting of "REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE" display

Push the lock of the lever with your finger to unlock, and pull the lever to the right.

Check the hopper of developer for toner remaining quantity.

Does the toner remain sufficiently (agitator shaft is not visible)?

Y N

Return the lever to the left.

Refill the toner.

Is "REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE" displayed again after one minute?

Y N


Is the "ON " displayed ?

Y N

Check the TS01 (toner remaining quantity sensor).


Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control bard) or developer.

Check the toner cartridge for its expiration date.

Check if the toner was set after adequate agitation.

Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control bard).



6-30

(3) "Replace waste toner cartridge" troubleshooting

This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a message concerning the waste toner

cartridge replacement is displayed and the print is disabled though the cartridge was replaced.

Perform the troubleshooting that corresponds to the following 1, 2 displayed on LCD of the

control panel.

1 Troubleshooting of "SET WASTE CARTRIDGE" display

Set the waste toner cartridge.

Does "SET WASTE CARTRIDGE" display on LCD disappear?

Y N


Is "On" displayed?

Y N

Check the MS05 (waste toner cartridge detection switch).

Contact fault of MS05.

Check the CBL03A, CBL031, or MS05 ASSY disconnected .



Check the waste toner cartridge for deformation or any fault.

Check if the waste toner cartridge is set correctly.


2 Troubleshooting of "CHANGE WASTE CARTRIDGE" display

Set the new waste toner cartridge.

Does "CHANGE WASTE CARTRIDGE" display on LCD disappear?

Y N


Is "On" displayed?

Y N

Check the MS05 (waste toner sensor).

(Check the TS02 by applying a magnetic screwdriver or steel plate such as a

metallic ruler, and full waste toner cartridge to the TS02.)

Check the TS02 and the cartridge for clearance.

Check the CBL03A, CBL031, and CBL035 for a short, loose connection, or

disconnection.



Check the waste toner cartridge for deformation or any fault.

Check if the waste toner cartridge is set correctly.




6-31


(4) "Replace paper" troubleshooting

This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a message concerning the paper

replacement is displayed and the print is disabled though the paper was replaced.

Perform the following troubleshooting according to the display on LCD of the control panel.

Troubleshooting of "SET PAPER" display

Set the paper roll attached with the paper flange.

Does "SET PAPER" display on LCD disappear?

Y N

Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 08, 09

and 10.

Is "On" displayed?

Y N

Check the PS11 (Roll 1 sensor) or PS12 (Roll 2 sensor).

Contacts in signal system of PS11 or PS12 may be faulty, or PS itself may be

faulty.

Check the CBL23, CBLR231, CBL24, CBLR241, CBL25 and CBLR251

for a short.

Check the PS11 or PS12 for its mounting position.

Check the flange guide for its mounting position.


Check the PS11 and PS12 for its mounting state.

Check the flange guide for its mounting position.

Check the paper flange for deformation or any fault.

Check if the paper flange is set correctly.

Replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor drive board).



7-1

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)


This chapter describes the type of print quality troubles and its corrective measures.

7.1 Print Quality Troubleshooting Method

If a print quality trouble occurs, print an engine test pattern saved in the memory inside the

engine to check if there is a failure at the engine side (hereinafter a printing of this engine test

pattern is called the engine test print).

The print quality troubleshooting method is classified into the following two depending on thecontents of failure.

- For the failures in the plotting length accuracy or registration, measure the printed engine

test pattern at the position shown in "7.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting

Specification Failure" to judge whether the measured value satisfies the reference value.

- For the failures in the background or print density, check doubtful parts from the symptom

to take a corrective measure. See "7.3 Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality

Failure."



7-2

7.1.1 Type of Engine Test Patterns

To output engine test patterns, enter maintenance code 10 in the engine maintenance mode,

select the appropriate subcode, and execute the engine test print. For procedures on how to print

test patterns, see Section 2.3.10.

Table 7-1 shows the relationship between subcodes and engine test patterns.

Table 7-1 Engine Test Pattern List

Engine test pattern image outputs are shown on the next page.

Note: Test patterns on the next page are only example showing what patterns will

be output. Pattern sizes and intervals are different from those actually output.

Test patterns 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and 17 are represented in solid black. But, they

have different images in actual output.

Test patterns 8, 9, and 10 are actually different with respect to line thickness.

Test patterns 14, 15, and 16 are actually different with respect to line

thickness and pattern combination.

Test patterns 18, or solid white pattern, is omitted in this example.

edocbuS nrettaptsetenignE metinoitaulavE

10 1nrettaP )sepirtslacitrevk ciht(arbezlacitreV tsohG-

20 2nrettaP draobrek cehC gniliosrepapesab / ytisnedtnirP-

30 3nrettaP latnozirohk ciht(arbezlatnoziroH

)sepirts

tsohG-

40 4nrettaP latnoziroh3yb1 rettiJ-

noitanimulliDELmrof inunoN-

raems / pik S-

tengamehtnoreyalrenotf onoitamroF-

rellor

noituloseR-

ytimrof inuegamI-

tnio jdaehDELf otnemtsu jdA-

noitisopnoitaxif f otnemtsu jdA-

50 5nrettaP latnoziroh2yb2

60 6nrettaP latnoziroh41yb2

70 7nrettaP hsemerauqstod-46,eniltod-1

80 8nrettaP semtod-1 senilnihtf oytilibicudorpeR-

htgneltnirpf otnemtsu jdadnatnemerusaeM-

noitartsigerf otnemtsu jdadnatnemerusaeM-

gnitnirpsuounitnoC-

90 9nrettaP hsemtod-2

01 01nrettaP hsemtod-4

11 11nrettaP tf ihstod-2,lacitrev2yb2 noitanimulliDELmrof inunI-

21 21nrettaP hseM+etihw / k calb enil / gniliosrepapesab / ytisnedegamI-

tnemerusaemhtdiw

31 31nrettaP elacs+hseM ssenerauqstuc / ycaruccahtgneltuC-

gnittolp / ycaruccahtgnelgnittolP-

ssenerauqs

noitartsigerf otnemtsu jdadnatnemerusaeM-

wek S-

senilnihtf oytilibicudorpeR-

gnitnirpsuounitnoC-

41 41nrettaP tod-1,eniltnals+hseM

51 51nrettaP tod-2,eniltnals+hseM

61 61nrettaP stod2dna1(,eniltnals+hseM

)dexim

71 71nrettaP k calbdiloS ytimrof inuegamI-

erusserppinrellorgnixif f otnemtsu jdA-81 81nrettaP etihwdiloS

91 91nrettaP acitrev3yb1noitanimulliDELmrof inunoN-

02 02nrettaP lacitrev2yb2



7-3


Pattern 1 Pattern 2

Pattern 3 Pattern 4

Pattern 5

Pattern 6

Pattern 7

Pattern 11

Pattern 17

Pattern 8Pattern 9

Pattern 10

Pattern 12

Pattern 13 Pattern 14

Pattern 15

Pattern 16



7-4

7.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure

7.2.1 Plotting Specification and Measuring Method

Note: To check registrations (top edge and side), always print the appropriate testpatterns. Also, replace the normal paper and the tracing paper and execute the

engine test print. Sizes and intervals are different from those actually output.

Paper output direction

V

B

C

H2 block

2 block

(C - H2 + B2 ) / H2+B2 × 100

.oN metI noitisoptnemerusaeM dradnatS skrameR

1 f oycaruccA

htgnelgnittolp

tahtHlatnozirohehterusaeM:noitceridnacsniaM

.sk colb47f odesopmocsi

noisnemidlacitrevehterusaeM:noitceridnacsbuS

.sk colb401f odesopmocsitahtV

drihtehterusaemdnanoisseccusnisteehseerhttuptuO*

.teehs

dna,tuotnirpehtretf asetunim51tuobarof tiaW* .teehstsetehterusaem

mm738.01=k colb1*

:noitceridnacsniaM-

)mm4±(%5.0±208

:noitceridnacsbuS-

)mm6.5±(%5.0±1.7211

51nrettaptsetenignE

2 gnittolP

ssenerauqs

47f odesopmocHnoisnemidlatnozirohehterusaeM

dna,sk colb47f odesopmocBnoisnemidlacitrev,sk colb

ehtgnisussenerauqsehtetaluclacotCnoisnemidlanogaid

.noitauqegniwollof

drihtehterusaemdnanoisseccusnisteehseerhttuptuO*

.teehs

dna,tuotnirpehtretf asetunim51tuobarof tiaW*

.nrettaptsetehterusaem

mm738.01=k colb1*

%2.0±- 51nrettaptsetenignE



7-5


L

VK

2 block H1

H2


3 egdepoT

noitartsiger

,egdethgirehtmorf detnuock colbht'KehtsseccA

ehtf onoisnemidlacitrevehtsitahtVerusaemdna

.sk colbtsomtnorf owt

ehterusaemdnanoisseccusnisteehseerhttuptuO*.teehsdriht



mm738.01=k colb1*

.sk colb72=K:noitceridlacitrev1A*

.sk colb02=K:noitceridlacitrev2A

.sk colb51=K:noitceridlacitrev3A

.sk colb51=K:noitceridlatnoziroh4A

:noitceridlacitrev1A-

mm0.3±7.12


mm0.3±7.12

:noitceridlacitrev3A-mm0.3±7.12

:noitceridlatnoziroh4A-

mm0.3±7.12

51nrettaptsetenignE-

4 retneC

noitartsiger

,egdepotehtmorf detnuock colbdnocesehtsseccA

f onoisnemidlatnozirohehtsitaht1Herusaemdna

.sk colbtsomthgirowteht

ehterusaemdnanoisseccusnisteehseerhttuptuO*

.teehsdriht

dna,tuotnirpehtretf asetunim51tuobarof tiaW*.nrettaptsetehterusaem

mm738.01=k colb1*


mm0.3±7.12


mm0.3±7.12


mm0.3±7.12

:noitceridlatnoziroh4A-mm0.3±7.12


5 wek S dna,egdepotehtmorf detnuock colbht'LehtsseccA

ehtf onoisnemidlatnozirohehtsitaht2Herusaem

tegot1Hmorf 2HtcartbuS.sk colbtsomthgirowt

.wek s

.sk colb401=L:noitceridlacitrev0A*

.sk colb47=L:noitceridlacitrev1A



.sk colb22=L:noitceridlatnoziroh4A


mm6.5±


mm4±


mm7.2±


mm8.1±


mm2.1±





7-6

L


V1

V2

7.2.2 Corrective Measure in Case of Plotting Specification Failure

The parameters that do not meet the required standards must be corrected referencing to the

appropriate procedures specified in Section 9.4 "Correction of Plotting Parameter."


6 ycaruccahtgneltuC otpotmorf htgnelllarevoehtsihcihw,LerusaeM

.noitisoptsomthgirehtta,egdemottob


.teehsdrihtdna,tuotnirpehtretf asetunim51tuobarof tiaW*



mm0.6±9811


mm0.4±148

:noitceridlacitrev2A-mm0.3±495


mm0.3±024

latnoziroh4A-

mm0.3±012:noitcerid


7 ssenerauqstuC ehtta)egdetf el(2Vdna)egdethgir(1VerusaeM

2VtcartbuS.egdepotehtmorf detnuock colbdnoces

.1Vmorf


.teehsdriht



mm738.01=k colb1*


mm148 / 0.3±


mm495 / 0.2±


mm024 / 4.1±


mm792 / 0.1±


mm792 / 0.1±




7-7


7.3 Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality Failure

Table 7-2 lists the image quality defects to be corrected. Troubleshooting procedures for

respective items are described in the following paragraphs.

Table 7-2 Image Quality Defects List

(1) Fog

(2) Uneven image density

(3) Fluctuation of image densityamong prints

(4) Low image density

(5) Lacking (partial)

(6) Poor image reproduction

(7) Lacking (horizontal blank streak)

(8) Lacking (vertical blank streak)

(9) Black stripe on print

(10) Black stripe (horizontal)

(11) Black stripe (vertical)

(12) Black banding (vertical)

(13) Black spot

(14) Unfixed toner

(15) Registration defect

(16) Image slanting

(17) Blank copy

(18) Image overlap

(19) Skip

(20) Smear

(21) Solid

All or part of image is fogged.

The image density is not uniform in the same print.

The image density is instable among prints.

The image density is low.

A part of the image is lost.

When the pattern is reproduced, the defect such as lacking is generated.

The image is lost in the form of horizontal streak.

The image is lost in the form of vertical streak.

Black stripes are printed on the paper partially or entirely.

Several black horizontal stripes are printed on the paper.

Several black vertical stripes are printed on the paper.

Black bands are printed on the paper.

Black spots are generated.

When the image is rubbed, the toner is separated from the paper.

The printed image is shifted vertically or horizontally.

The image is printed slantingly.

No image is printed on the paper.

The same image is printed in duplicate.

The section that should be reproduced horizontally is not generated.

Duplicated or smeary image is generated.

The paper is printed in complete black instead of image.

Item Description



7-8

(1) Fog

Print sample Trouble symptom and check method

The image is fogged entirely or partially.

Print engine test patterns. The background is fogged.

Cause Measure

1. The developer blade suffers from poor charging

performance for reason(s) shown below.

The blade is worn/damaged.

The magnet roller surface is soiled/damaged.

The DV spacers on both sides of the magnet roller

are worn/damaged, or contact surfaces on both ends

of the drum are damaged/worn.

The DV spacers are faulty.

The drum surface that contacts the DV spacers is faulty.

1. Take the following action(s) depending on the cause

identified.

Clean or replace the blade.

Clean or replace the magnet roller.

Check the magnet roller surface and, if damaged,

replace the roller.

Replace the spacers if damaged.

2. The contact spring of the developer unit is in imperfect

contact.

2. Check the contact spring of the developer unit. Replace

the spring if necessary.

3. The charge unit is being discharged by itself or to other

parts/materials.

3. Check the operating condition of the charge unit. (Turn

on the charge unit , maintenance code <08> "01") Replace

the unit if necessary.

4. The drum is soiled or degraded.

The drum is photodegraded (the drum is exposed to the

lighting system and the like).

4. Replace the process cartridge.

When the process cartridge was exposed to fluorescent

lamps for 10 minutes, leave it in the dark place for

about 12 hours to restore the optical performance.



7-9


Cause Measure

5. The charge elimination LED suffers from imperfect

lighting or soiling.

5. Check the charge elimination LED for turn-on.

(maintenance <08> "05")Clean the LED.

6. Unspecified toner is used. 6. Instruct the user to use only the specified toner. Clean the

entire developer unit.

7. The output of the charge unit is high or low.

The charge unit is imbalanced between left and right.

7. Measure the current on the charge unit monitor terminal

CH1 of the high-voltage power unit. See Section 9.1.1.

Check the charge unit roller 1 for wear, damage, and

soiling. Replace it if necessary.

8. The bias output of the developer unit is high or low. 8. Adjust the developer unit bias. See Sections 9.1.2 and

9.1.3.

Check CBL22 of the developer unit bias for connection.

9. The separator is not discharging the electricity. 9. Check the data accessed with the code <08> "04."

Adjust the separation unit bias. See Section 9.1.5.

10. The toner is fed too much.

The space between drum and roll becomes short due to

worn DV spacers.

10. Replace the magnet roller, as well as DV spacers at both

ends of the roller.



7-10

(2) Uneven image density


Print engine test patterns.

The density and line thickness are nonuniform on a place-by-

place basis.

Cause Measure

1. The bias output of the developer unit is low or the contact

spring is in imperfect contact.

2. Check the bias output of the developer unit.

(maintenance <09> "02")

Check the contact spring for contact condition.

2. The developer blade is worn entirely or partially. 3. When the blade has been used to output more than

80000 sheets, replace it.

When the blade is remarkably worn, replace it.

3. The LED head and lens are soiled. 4. Clean the LED head and lens.

4. The drum is soiled or degraded. 5. Replace the process cartridge.

5. The magnet roller is worn. 6. Replace the magnet roller.

6. The photosensitive drum is not grounded completely. 7. Check the drum for grounding.

Check the frame leaf spring.

Check the installation condition of the process

cartridge.

7. The toner is not fed uniformly due to worn magnet roller. 8. Check the toner formation on the magnet roller. If the

thickness of the toner layer is substantially fluctuating,

replace the roller.

8. The luminous strobe width of the LED head is

improperly set.

9. Check the maintenance code <12> "731" to "733" data.

Check the luminous energy indicated on the LED head

to verify the luminous strobe width can generate the

energy. If the strobe width is not properly set, adjust it.

See Section 9.3.

If the trouble is not removed, enter the strobe width

larger than the setting to recheck the machine condition.

9. The remaining toner is short. 10. Check the toner amount sensor (TS01) and refill the toner.

10. The toner is not fed smoothly since the area between the

developer blade and the magnet roller is blocked by dust.

11. Clean or replace the developer blade and the magnet roller.



7-11


(3) Fluctuation of image density among prints

elpmastnirP dohtemkcehcdnamotpmyselbuorT

larevesnodetnirpylsuounitnocsinrettaptsetemasehtnehW

.stuotnirpesohtgnomatneref f idsiytisnedegamieht,steehs

esuaC erusaeM

.1 .dedargedrodeliossimurdehT .1 .egdirtracssecorpehtecalperronaelC

.2 .tcerrocnisitinurepolevedehtf otuptuosaibehT .tinurepolevedehtf otuptuosaibehtk cehC

tuptuosaibehttsu jdA)>20<90edocecnanetiam(

eeS.tluserehtotgnidrocca 2.1.9snoitceS dna 3.1.9 .

.noitidnoctcatnocrof gnirpstcatnocehtk cehC

.3 elbuortsihT(.rellortengamnrowoteudtrohssirenotehT

).etartnirphgihtaruccootenorpsi

.3 ehtf I.rellortengamehtnonoitamrof renotehtk cehC

ehtecalper,demrof tonsireyalehtronihtsireyalrenot

.rellor

.4 euddesaercedsirenotehtf oyticapacnoitacif irtceleehT

enorpsielbuortsihT(.rellortengamdegamadronrowot

).etartnirphgihtaruccoot

.4 rebmunehtf I(.edalbehtecalperronaelC.edalbehtk cehC

edalbsadenif edeulavehtdedeecxesahsteehstuptuof o

).edalbehtecalper,ef ilecivres

.5 .desusirenotdeif icepsnU .5 .tinurepolevederitneehtnaelC.resuehttcurtsnI



7-12

(4) Low image density


The density of the copied image is low. The line width

equivalent to 3 dots is thin.

Cause Measure


2. The drum is degraded. 2. Replace the process cartridge.

3. The LED duty is low. 3. Check the LED duty (maintenance code <12> "731,"

"732," "733"). See Section 9.3 for the standard value.

4. The developer blade is worn. 4. Replace the developer blade.

5. The bias output of the developer unit is low. 5. Check the developer bias voltage. See Sections 9.1.2and 9.1.3.

Check the developer spring for contact.

6. The charge unit discharges electricity excessively. 6. Check the discharge level (maintenance code <09> "01").

Check the load current. (high-voltage power unit terminal

CH1) See Section 9.1.1.

7. The transfer unit discharges the electricity faulty. 7. Check the charge wire (2) for looseness.

Clean the charge wire (2).

Check the transfer unit for installation condition.

Check the discharge level of the transfer unit (maintenance

code <09> "03").

Check the load current. (high-voltage power unit terminal

CH3) See Section 9.1.4.8. The drum is not grounded completely. 8. Check the drum for grounding.

Check the frame leaf spring.

Check the installation condition of the process cartridge.

9. Unspecified toner is used. 9. Instruct the user.

10. The developing clearance is increased due to soiled or

scratched DV spacers.

10. Check the DV spacers.

Check the drum surface that contacts the DV spacers.



7-13


(5) Lacking (partial)


A part of the image is not printed.

Cause Measure

1. The paper is dampened. 1. Replace the paper.

Instruct the user.

2. The toner is short or unevenly charged. 2. Refill the toner.

If the toner is run out, check the toner amount sensor.

While there is no toner, check the magnet roller surface

for roughness. Replace the roller if necessary.

3. The drum is degraded or soiled. 3. Replace the process cartridge. Cleaning photodegrades the

drum. So, wait until the photodegradation is no longer

observed.



Check the output of the transfer unit (maintenance

code <09>"03").

Check the current consumption at the high-voltage

power unit terminal CH3. See Section 9.1.4.

5. The paper does not contact the drum completely during

the transfer process due to faulty paper feed such as skew.

5. Check the clearance between drum bottom and the

transfer guide plate.

For the skew, see "No. 5" in Section 7.2.1.

6. Correct pressure is not applied due to deformed developer

blade.

6. Replace the developer blade.

7. The magnet roller surface is scratched or worn. 7. Replace the magnet roller.

8. The DV spacers are damaged. 8. Check the DV spacers.

Check the drum surface that contacts the DV spacers.

9. Bits are missing. 9. Conduct the corrective action specified in "Poor image

reproduction." See the next page.

10. The paper path is not parallel. 10. Adjust the installation position of the fixation.

See Section 9.4.2

11. The agitator is deformed or incorrectly mounted. 11. Replace the agitator spring.

12. The toner is not fed smoothly since the area between the

developer blade and the magnet roller is blocked by dust.

12. Clean or replace the developer blade and the magnet roller.



7-14

(6) Poor image reproduction


emosotdecudorpererasnrettap,tuptuoerasnrettaptsetnehW

.devresboeraselbuortgniwollof ehttubtnetxe

retcarahcytluaF

.gnissimerastiB

.dnablacitrevediwmm-8f omrof ehtnignissimsiegamiehT

.)ylmodnar(detaepersiegamiehT

esuaC erusaeM

.1 .evitcef edsidaehDELehT .1 .noitareporof daehDELehtk cehC

.2 .detsu jdayltcerrocnisitinurewopegatlov-hgihehT .2 eeS.tinurewopegatlov-hgihehttsu jdA 1.9noitceS .



7-15


(7) Lacking (horizontal blank streak)


When the test pattern is printed, horizontal streaks are

generated, leading to imperfect image.

Cause Measure


Instruct the user.



Check the output of the transfer unit (maintenance

code <09>"03").

Check the load current at the high-voltage power unit

terminal CH3. See Section 9.1.4.

3. The bias of the developer unit suffers from imperfectcontact or unstable output. 3.

C heck the contact developer s pr ing f or contactcondition.

Check the developer bias output (maintenance code

<08>"02"). Adjust the bias output. See Sections 9.1.2and 9.1.3.

4. The magnet roller is rotation incorrectly.

The drive system (gears) of the developer unit suffers

from damage or galling.

The DV spacers are damaged or rotation is incorrectly.

4. Turn the gears of the developer unit to check the magnet

roller for rotation.

Check the drive system of developer unit.

Check DV spacers for damage.

Check the contact surfaces between DV spacers and

the drum for deformation and dust adhesion.



7-16

(8) Lacking (vertical blank streak)


When the test pattern is printed, blank space is generated

vertically in the form of streak.

Cause Measure


Instruct the user.

2. The charge wire 2 is soiled. 2. Clean or replace the charge wire (2).

3. The toner is short or unevenly charged. 3. Refill the toner

If the toner is run out, check the toner amount sensor.

While there is no toner, check the magnet roller surface

for roughness. Replace the roller if necessary.

4. The pressure is substantially increased due to deformed

developer blade. Foreign materials are mixed into the

machine.

4. Check the developer blade for deformation.

5. The LED head is faulty. 5. Check the LED head for operation.

If the LED is faulty, replace the head.

6. A part of the magnet roller is worn or scratched, resulting

in short toner feeding.

6. Check the magnet roller surface. Check whether the toner

layer is formed on the surface and, if not, replace the

roller.

7. A s oft blocking (coagulation of toner br ought by

decreased fluidity) occurs in the developer unit due to

application of unspecified toner.

7. Instruct the user. Clean the entire developer unit.


9. The LED head does not emit light. 9. Check the LED head for operation.

10. The charge unit grid is soiled. 10. Clean the grid.

11. The toner on the magnet roller is partially thick. 11. Check whether the developer blade (DV) is scratched and,

if so, replace the blade.



7-17


(9) Black stripe on print


tonsinrettapeht,detnirpsinrettaptsetenigneehtnehW

egamiehtnodetarenegerasepirtsk calb,daetsnI.decudorper .yleritneroyllaitrap

esuaC erusaeM

.1 sepirtsetihwrok calbf omrof ehtniraeppastcef edehT

.snrettapevitcef edrogniliosf oepytehtnognidneped

.1 .noitareporof daehDELehtk cehC

.daehDELehtecalper,nodenrutsinoitcestnavelerehtf I



7-18

(10) Black stripe (horizontal)


When the test pattern is printed, black bands are generated

on the paper.

Cause Measure

1. Charge wire 1 is soiled or foreign materials adhere on the

wire.


2. The developer blade is damaged or in imperfect contact. 2. Replace the developer blade.

3. The LED head is faulty. 3. Check the LED head for operation.

4. There are members or foreign materials that contact the

paper in the paper path between the drum and the heat

roller.

4. Check whether there are members or foreign materials that

contact the paper.

5. In the paper path between the drum and the heat roller, the

paper is sagged to resultantly get in touch with machinemembers.

5. Check the heat roller and suction drive systems.

Check the evacuation performance and operatingcondition of the suction fan.

Following lists the outer diameter and perimeter of the roller-related parts. Locate the failed part

from cycles of the trouble observed in the print sample, and then replace or clean it.

Parts Outer diameter (mm) Perimeter (mm)

Photosensitive drum 60 188

Heat roller 50 157

Backup roller 53 167

Developing sleeve 40 63

LED roller 12 38



7-19


(11) Black stripe (vertical)


tubdecudorpersiegamieht,detnirpsinrettaptsetehtnehW

era,mm1nahtsselsihtdiwesohw,sepirtsk calblareves .noitceriddeef repapehtnidetareneg

esuaC erusaeM

.1 .detairtssimurdehT

.murdehtoterehdaslairetamngieroF

.1 .egdirtracssecorpehtecalpeR

tcatnoctahtslairetamngierof eraerehtrehtehwk cehC

.tidnuoramurdeht

seref retni)CPO(regnif noitarapesehtrehtehwk cehC

.murdehthctarcsotmurdehthtiw

.2 .detairtssirellortaehehT .2 .rellortaehehtecalpeR

tcatnoctahtslairetamngierof eraerehtrehtehwk cehC

.tidnuorataehrelloreht

.3 .tilsiDELehtf otibehT .3 ,f f odenruttonsidaehDELehtf otibtnavelerehtnehW .daehDELehtecalper

.4 ehttcatnoctahtslairetamngierof rosrebmemeraerehT

taehehtdnamurdehtneewtebhtaprepapehtnirepap

.rellor

.4 tahtslairetamngierof rosrebmemeraerehtrehtehwk cehC

.repapehttcatnoc

.5 repapeht,rellortaehdnamurdneewtebhtaprepapehtnI

enihcamhtiwhcuotnitegyltnatluserotdeggassi

.srebmem

.5 .smetsysevirdnoitcusdnarellortaehehtk cehC

gnitarepodnaecnamrof repnoitaucaveehtk cehC

.naf noitcusehtf onoitidnoc

.6 .dehctarcssiedalbrenaelcehT .6 .egdirtracssecorpehtecalpeR



7-20

(12) Black banding (vertical)


decudorpersiegamieht,detnirpsinrettaptsetehtnehW

laretalehtnidetarenegerasepirtsk calblarevestub.)noitceriddeef repapehtotlamronnoitcerideht(noitcerid

esuaC erusaeM

.1 lellarapnoitceridehtnideliosrodegamadsimurdehT

erasepirtsk calbeht,esacsihtnI(.sixamurdehtot

).mm081f olavretniehttadetareneg

.1 f imurdehtnaelcrO.egdirtracssecorpehtecalpeR

.delios

.2 murdehtotserehdaedalbrenaelcehtmorf renotehT

tadetarenegerasepirtsk calbeht,esacsihtnI(.ecaf rus

).mm081f olavretnieht

.2 egdirtracssecorpehtecalperrO.murdehtnaelC

.3 .dehctarcssiecaf rusrellortaehehT .3 .rellortaehehtecalperrok cehC

.4 .dehctarcssiecaf rusrellortengamehT .4 .tiecalper,dehctarcssiecaf rusrellortengamehtnehW



7-21


(13) Black spot


When the test pattern is printed, black spots are generated onthe paper.

Cause Measure

1. The drum is scratched or soiled. (The black sports are

generated at the interval of 180 mm.)

1. Replace the process cartridge. Or, clean the drum if soiled.

2. The heat roller surface is scratched or soiled. 2. Check and clean or replace the heat and backup rollers.

3. After the drum passes through the bottom of the drum, it

contacts the separation finger (OPC).

3. Check and correct the poorly discharging separation

unit. (Measure the current at the terminal CH4 of the

high-voltage power unit.) See Section 9.1.5.Check the wire for breakage.

Check the separation unit for discharging (maintenancecode <09>"04").

Check the heat roller and backup rollers for faulty

rotation.

Check the belt (TRANS) for expansion and slip.

4. The toner is dropping from the separation finger (OPC)

and cleaner.

4. Clean the separation finger (OPC) and cleaner.

Check the separation finger (OPC). Replace if

necessary.

5. The magnet roller surface is scratched to cause a leak

between the developer bias and the drum.

5. Check the magnet roller surface for scratches. If it is

damaged, replace the roller.

Check the bias output of the developer unit (maintenance

code <09>"02"). Adjust the bias output according to the

result. See Sections 9.1.2 and 9.1.3.

6. The charge wire (2) is loosened. 6. Replace the charge wire (2).



7-22

(14) Unfixed toner


If the copied characters and image are rubbed with hands,

they are easily separated from the paper.

Cause Measure

1. The paper is defective. 1. Replace the paper.

Instruct the user.

2. The heat roller is scratched or deformed. 2. Replace the roller.

3. The backup roller pressure is short. 3. C he ck a nd a dj us t th e n ip p re ssu re ( ma in te na nc e c ode

<09> "07," 08," "09" ).

For adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.1.



7-23


(15) Registration defect


When the test pattern is printed, registrations are shifted

vertically or horizontally.

Cause Measure

1. Vertical shift: The registrations are adjusted incorrectly. 1. Adjust the top edge registration (maintenance code<11>

"01").

For adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.6.

2. Vertical shift: The registration clutch CL04 is slippery or

galled.

2. Replace the clutch (registration) CL04.

3. Horizontal shift: The side registrations are adjusted

incorrectly.

3. Adjust the side registrations. (maintenance code<11>

"02." for adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.7)

4. Vertical shift: The registration torque limiter is faulty. 4. Replace the torque limiter.



7-24

(16) Image slanting


The paper is skewed and resultantly the image is printed

on the slant.

Cause Measure

1. The paper is not loaded correctly. 1. Reload the paper.

Instruct the user.

2. The paper feed roller nonuniformly contacts the paper.

Or, the roller is nonuniformly worn.

2. Replace the paper feed roller.

3. The registration roller nonuniformly contacts the pinch

roller. Or, either or both rollers are nonuniformly worn.

3. Replace the registration and pinch rollers.

4. The cutaway roller suffers from nonuniform contact or

wear.

4. Replace the cutaway roller.

5. The fixation is not mounted at the correct position. 5. Adjust the fixation mounted position. See section 9.4.2.

6. The nip pressure of the heat roller is improperly adjusted.

Or, the pressure is imbalanced.

6. Adjust the nip pressure. (maintenance code <09> "07,"

"08," "09," for adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.1.)



7-25


(17) Blank copy


detnirpsiegamiehtyltnatluserdnadewek ssirepapehT

.tnalsehtno

esuaC erusaeM

.1 .tuonursirenotehT .1 .renotehtllif eR

ecaf rusrellortengamehtk cehc,renotonsierehtelihW

.ssenhguorrof

.rosnestnuomarenotehtk cehc,tuonursirenotehtf I

.2 .tinurepolevedehtnotuptuosaibonsierehT .2 ecnanetniam(.tinurepolevedehtf otuptuosaibehtk cehC

)"20">90<edoc

tcatnocrof gnirpstcatnoctinurepolevedehtk cehC

.noitidnoc

roF.saibtinurepolevedehttsu jda,tuptuoonsierehtf I

ees,serudecorptnemtsu jda 2.1.9snoitceS dna 3.1.9 .

.3 .yticirtceleehtgnigrahcsidtonsitinuref snartehT .3 .tcennocsidrof )2(eriwegrahcehtk cehC

ecnanetniam(.tinuref snartehtf otuptuoehtk cehC

ees,serudecorptnemtsu jdarof ,"30">90<edoc snoitceS2.1.9 dna 3.1.9 ).

.4 sepirtsk calbroypock calbdiloS(.ytluaf sidaehDELehT

).snrettaptsetehtnognidnepeddevresboera

.4 .noitareporof daehDELehtk cehC

.5 .yltcerrocdednuorgtonsimurdehT .5 .gnidnuorgrof murdehtk cehC

.gnirpsf aelemarf ehtk cehC

.egdirtracssecorpehtf onoitidnocnoitallatsniehtk cehC

.6 .yltcerrocdetnuomtonsignirpsrotatigaehT .6 f itiecalpeR.yltcerrocgnirpsrotatigaehttnuoM

.demrof ed

.7 eht,rO.degamadsimetsysevirdtinurepolevedehT

.detatortonsirotomrepoleved

.7 .degamadf itiecalpeR.tinuleehwevirdehtk cehC



7-26

(18) Image overlap


The image remains on the drum and resultantly the same

image is printed on the paper.

Cause Measure

1. The cleaner blade suffers from imperfect contact (due to

hardening or wear).

1. Check the cleaner blade for contact condition. Replace

it if necessary.

The blade is hardened at low temperatures.

2. The charge elimination LED is not turned on. 2. Check the deelectrification LED for operation. (maintenance

code <06>"05," "06")

3. The heat roller is offset. 3. Clean the heat roller.

4. When the exposure drum is photodegraded with the toner

image adhered to it, the image overlap defect occurs.

4. Leave the process cartridge in a dark place for about 12

hours.

5. The drum is aged or degraded. 5. Replace the process cartridge.



7-27


(19) Skip


sinrettapdirgehtf otrapa,detnirpsinrettaptsetehtnehW

.)noitceridlatnozirohehtni(decudorperton

esuaC erusaeM

.1 detatortoneratinurepolevedehtf osrecapsVDehT

.dehctarcsrodeliossiecaf rusrecapseht,rO.yltcerroc

.1 .srecapsVDehtecalpeR

srecapsVDehttcatnoctahtsecaf rusehtrehtehwk cehC

.demrof edera

.2 .demrof ederamurdehtf oegdehtobnosraeG .2 .egamadrof sraeghtobk cehC

.3 .yltcerrocdetatortonsirellortengamehT .3 htoomsnitluserlliwsraegehtgninrutrehtehwk cehC

.rellortengamehtf onoitator

ehtf oegdehtobnosrecapsVDehtrehtehwk cehC

.degamaderarellortengam.4 yltcerrocdetatortonsimurdehtrodek colbsirenaelcehT

.sraegdegamadoteud

.4 .renaelcehtnaelC

detareposimurdehtrehtehwk cehcotraegehtnruT

.ylhtooms

.5 .denepmadsirepapehT .5 .repapehtecalpeR

.resuehttcurtsnI

.6 .noisehdatsudrogniliosmorf sref f usecaf rusmurdehT .6 .egdirtracssecorpehtecalperro,murdehtnaelC



7-28

(20) Smear


When the test pattern is printed, duplicated or smeary image

is generated on the grid pattern.

Horizontal lines are duplicated or smeared.

Cause Measure

1. The gears and paper feed system are damaged. 1. Replace the gears.

2. The magnet roller is not rotated correctly. 2. Check whether turning the gears will result in smooth

rotation of the magnet roller.

Check whether the tracking rollers on both edge of the

magnet roller are damaged.

3. The cleaner is blocked or the drum is not rotated correctly

due to damaged gears.


4. The cutter is not working correctly. 4. Check the paper path mechanism.

5. The fixation is not mounted at the appropriate position. 5. Adjust the position of the fixation. For adjustment procedures,

see Section 9.4.2.

6. In the paper path system, there are some obstacles that

hinder the paper feed.

6. Check the paper path system.



7-29


(21) Solid black

Is the pattern image identifiable?

Y N

Is the charge wire working? (Check the load current of the charger. See Section 9.1.1)

Y N

Check the CBL21 for its connection and short.

Is a blank space observed at the top or bottom edge of the print?

Y N

Check the charger and surroundings for short.

(Execute the troubleshooting "2032." See Section 6.3.1(6).)

Adjust the load current of the charger. see Section 9.1.1.

Check the LED head for operation.

If necessary, replace the LED head.

Check the load current of the charger. See Section 9.1.1.

Check the charger and surroundings for short (Execute the troubleshooting "2032." See Section

6.3.1(6).)

Check the bias output of the developer. (maintenance code <08> "02", for adjustment procedures,

see Section 9.1.2 and 9.1.3)



8-1

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)


This chapter describes how to disassemble and assemble the device when it is necessary to

replace the parts.

8.1 How to Read This Manual

8.1.1 Rules for Disassembly/Assembly

This Section defines several rules used in the part replacement (disassembly/assembly)

procedures.

Note: Before disassembling the intended section, examine and comprehend thecomplete installation condition. This allows you to assemble the device

smoothly.

Before replacing a part, be sure to turn the device off and unplug the

power cable from the power outlet.

To protect the photosensitive material from degradation, be sure to close

the upper cover whenever unnecessary.

Removal : Shows the disassembling procedures. Note that some procedures are detailed in

illustrations.

Installation : Shows the assembling procedures. Since the device is assembled by executing the

disassembling procedures reversely, only precautions are described in the

assembling procedures.

Direction : Positions and directions (including those of engine interior) described in the

procedures are defined as follows (see Figure 8-1).

Front : Front panel of the device

Right : Right panel of the device when viewed from the front

Left : Left panel of the device when viewed from the front

Rear : Rear panel of the device



8-2

8.1.2 Covers

Figure 8-1 shows the nomenclatures of the covers attached to the device.

Figure 8-1 Nomenclatures of Covers

Manual feed cover

Front cover

Front cover 2

Roll 1 door

Roll 2 door

Top cover

Right upper cover

Filter cover 1

Waste toner door

Filter cover 2

FDR cover

FDL cover

Left upper cover 1

Rear cover 2

Rear cover 1

Cutter door

Buffer door



8-3


8.2 Replacing the Parts

8.2.1 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MRC (MRC 2 Board)

<Removal>

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs)

2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs)

Right upper cover

Left upper cover



8-4

3 Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs)

4 Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1 pc each)

5 Disconnect the connector provided on both side of the device.

Connector on the left side of the device

FDL cover

FDR cover

Front cover 2



8-5


White connector CN5A (13 pins, Red and black stripes)

White connector CN5B (8 pins, Red and black stripes)



Secondary power supply translucent connector (4 pins, Red and black stripes/Orange and black stripes)

Secondary power supply translucent connector (6 pins, Red and black stripes)

* More connectors are used on the FM model.

White connector (15 pins, Red and black stripes)

White connector (6 pins, Red and black stripes)

Blue connector (15 pins, Red and black stripes)

Secondary power supply blue connector (6 pins, Red and black stripes)

Connector on the right side of the device:





Blue connector CN3B (10 pins, Red and black stripes)

Blue connector CN4B (11 pins, Red and black stripes)

Primary power supply connector (2 pins, Black and white stripes)Primary power supply connector (4 pins, Black and white stripes)

Secondary power supply connector (2 pins, Red and black stripes/Orange and brown stripes)

Secondary power supply connector C105 (6 pins, Orange and brown stripes)

High-voltage power supply connector (Red stripes) 4



8-6

6 Push in the cables being exit from the electrical box to the electrical box along with the

connectors.

Left side of the device:

Right side of the device:

7 Remove the front cover. (set screw, 5 pcs each)



8-7


8 Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box.

9 Remove the cable clamp (2 clamps on MF model) (2 set screws) and the cable to take out the

electrical box.

Electrical box

Cable clamp (for MF alone) Cable clamp

0 Remove the board cover (set screw 8 pcs)



8-8

A Remove the MRC2 board. (set screw 8 pcs)

As for the MF model, remove MSC2 board before removing the electrical box. (6 set screws)

EEPROM

B Remove EEPROM and transfer it to the new board.

MSC2 board

(As for MF model)



8-9


8.2.2 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-USB (USB 2 board)

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1.

2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2.

3 Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 3.

4 Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1 pc each) See Section 8.2.1 4.

5 Unplug the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 5.


connectors. See Section 8.2.1 6.

7 Remove the front cover. (set screw, 5 pcs each) See Section 8.2.1 7.

8 Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box. See Section 8.2.1 8.

9 Remove the cable clamp by unscrewing the two set screws, disconnect the cable, and remove

the electrical box. See Section 8.2.1 9.

0 Remove the board cover. (set screw 8 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 0.

A Remove the USB board. (set screw 4 pcs and connector 1 pc.)



8-10

8.2.3 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MEC (MEC board)







connectors. See Section 8.2.16.


8 Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box. See Section 8.2.1

8.




A Remove the MEC board. (set screw 6 pcs and connector 5 pcs)

As for the MF model, remove MSC2 board before removing the electrical box. (6 set screws)

NVRAM

B Remove NVRAM and transfer it to the new board.



8-11


8.2.4 Replacing the Controller Fan

<Removal>





5 Unplug connectors. See Section 8.2.1 5.





8.




A Remove the fan. (set screw 2 pcs)

Controller fan



8-12

8.2.5 Replacing the Paper Size Sensor and Paper Jam Sensor

<Removal>

1 Remove the cutter door. (set screw 4 pcs)

2 Remove the connector (1 pc each) and set screw (1 pc each) from disconnect the paper size

sensor and paper jam sensor.

Cutter door



8-13


8.2.6 Replacing the Cutter Unit

<Before starting the replacement>

Note: Be sure to turn the main power switch off before starting replacement,

because cutter replacement work involves connection and disconnection

of the connector.

Make sure that the connectors are correctly connected before operation,

because if the power is turned on when the connector is improperly

connected, the device will not start properly.

Be careful during the work to prevent personal injury. The cutter is bare -

not protected with a cover.

Moving blade Fixed blade

Main power switch

<Removal>

1 Draw out roll 1 door. (1st stage alone)

Open the roll 1 door somewhat so that it may not interfere with removal of the cutter unit.

Roll 1 door

2 Remove the cutter cover. (Set screws 4 pcs)



8-14

Cutter cover

Rear cover 2

3 Remove the rear cover 2. (Set screws 4 pcs)



8-15


4 Unplug the connector

Note Use care when removing the connector so that the receiving side pin may

not be bent.

1. Remove the connectors for the cutter motor and the paper size sensor from connectors

CN27 and CN28 on RFU board, and then place them on the feed board box.

2. Remove the connectors wired from the low-pressure power supply on the device body,

feed pulse motor and MEC board from connectors CN21, CN22 and CN29. Then pull

them out from the side face of the feed board box and fix them on the sheet metal with

a piece of tape.

(Remove the cable from the device body since it interferes with removal of the cutter

unit.)

Fix them using tape to protect

them from damage.

Pull it upward

Cable of cutter unit

Cable being led from the device body

Pull it sideways

Cutter center

supporting sheet metal

5 Remove the cutter center supporting sheet metal (Screws: 2 pcs)



8-16

6 Remove the cutter guide supporting sheet metal (Set screws 4 pcs)

This sheet metal is provided at the bottom of the device. Reasonable care is needed in its

removal since it is somewhat difficult to remove and can be easily dropped and lost.

Pin (Pin on the opposite side is provided on the

backside of the motor)

Tilt the cutter unit somewhat

and then pull it out straight.

Be sure to tilt the cutter unit. Otherwise, the

motor bottom can damage the wiring harness.

Tilt and then pull it out gradually.

The cutter unit is fitted to the pins on the device body. So remove the pins first.

Reasonable care must be exercised in the removal not to drop it inadvertently. (The same holds

true for the installation.)

For details of the work, see the following "Cutter Unit Removal Procedure".

<Cutter Unit Removal Procedure>

Note Don't remove all screws at one time. Otherwise, the cutter might fall off.

Be sure to support the cutter while removing the screws.

Removed parts

Screws : 14 pcs

Covers : Rear cover 2 and cutter cover 1 pcs for eachSmall part : Cutter center supporting sheet metal 1 pcs



8-17


<Installation>

1 Install the replacing cutter. (Set screws 6 pcs)

Install the cutter in the procedure reverse to the removal.

1. Tilt the cutter somewhat and then install it straight.

Like in the removal, use care not to damage the cable on the bottom of the cutter motor.

When fixing the unit with the screws, hold the unit with hand while taking care not to

lose the screws.

Position of the screws for the cutter center supporting

sheet metal depends on the given model.

Cutter centersupporting sheet metal

Butt positionFor 1- or 2-stage

feed

2. Fit the cutter unit to the pins on the device body.

3. After fitting to the pins, fix the cutter unit with the screws.



8-18

2 Plug the connector.

1. Lead in the cutter motor connector and the paper size sensor connector of the cutter

unit through the top and insert them to connectors CN27 and CN28 on the RFU board.

Use care so that cables may not

be caught with surrounding parts.

Cutter coverRear cover 2

Roll 1 door

2. Lead in the connectors from the low-voltage power supply on the device body, feed

pulse motor and MEC board through the side face and then insert to connectors CN21,

CN22 and CN29 on RFU board.

3 Install the cutter cover and rear cover 2, and then close the roll 1 door. (Set screws 8 pcs)

4 Turn on the main power switch and proceed to adjustment of the cut length accuracy.

It is a must to confirm the normal operation of the device and to adjust squareness of the cut.

For adjustment of squareness of the cut, see 9.4.3 of this document.



8-19


8.2.7 Replacing the High Voltage Power Unit

<Removal>







connectors. See Section 8.2.1 6



8.



0 Unplug the all connectors from the high voltage power unit.

A Remove the high voltage power unit. (set screw 9 pcs)

High-voltage power supply unit

Remove the cable and then install on

the new high-voltage power supply unit.



8-20

8.2.8 Replacing the Low Voltage Power Unit

<Removal>










8.



0 Unplug the all connectors from the low voltage power unit.

A Remove the low voltage power unit. (set screw 6 pcs)

Low-voltage power supply unit

The screw is not provided in this portion on the

low-voltage power supply models with the

improved sturdiness against damages.



8-21


8.2.9 Replacing the Power Switch

<Removal>


2 Unplug the power switch connectors.

3 Remove the bracket that secures the power switch and remove the switch. (set screw 2 pcs)

Power switch

connectors



8-22

Filter cover 2

Filter cover 1

8.2.10 Replacing the Filter

<Removal>

1 Remove the filter cover 1 or filter cover 2.

2 Remove respective filters.



8-23


8.2.11 Replace the waste toner bottle switch and the waste toner sensor.

<Removal>


2 Remove the waste toner bottle.

Waste toner bottle

Sheet metal on MS05

sensor

TS02 sensor

MS05 switch

Sheet metal on TS02 sensor

3 Remove the sheet metals. (Set screws 2 pcs for each sheet metal)

When removing TS02 sensor, remove the sheet metal on MS05 switch first and then remove the sheetmetal on TS02 sensor.

4 Remove MS05 switch or TS02 sensor. (Set screws 2 pcs and connector 1 pcs for each)



8-24

8.2.12 Replacing the Fixation Unit

<Removal>



3 Remove the front cover. (set screw 7 pcs)

Cover (FDL)Cover (FDR)

Front cover

Manual feed drawer

4 Remove cover (FDL) and cover (FDR). (Set screws 1 pcs for each)

5 Remove the manual feed drawer. (Set screws 2 pcs)



8-25


6 Pull and remove the manual feed tray.

7 Remove the connectors on the right side of the device. (1 connector for fan, 1 connector for

temperature fuse, 1 connector for halogen lamp, 2 connectors for thermister, 1 connector for

each of MS06-1 and MS06-2 and 1 connector for PS07.)

Connector for fan

Connector for

thermister (Red)

Connector for

thermister (White)

Connector for

temperature fuse

(Yellow)

MS06-1 (Blue)

MS06-2 (White)Connector for halogen lamp

Connector for PS07

Manual feed tray



8-26

Fan unit

MS06 unit

8 Remove the fan unit. (Set screws 5 pcs)

9 Remove MS06 unit. (Set screws 1 pcs)



8-27


0 Remove the fixation unit motor. (Set screws 2 pcs and connector 1 pcs)

Alignment adjusting screw

Set screw for fixing sheet metal

Fixation unit motor

Connector

A Remove 1 set screw of the fixing sheet metal for the alignment adjusting screw.

B Loosen 4 sets screws on both sides of the fixation unit.



8-28

C Pull out the right side of the fixation unit by the length equal to the slot in the setscrew

section for the fixation unit.

D Make sure the fixing sheet metal is detached from the device. Remove the fixing sheet plate

and the alignment adjusting screw by turning the alignment adjusting screw.

E Push back the right side of the fixation unit and then move the wiring harness for the

halogen lamp, thermister and temperature fuse toward the right side of the fixation unit

(from the outside of the right side plate to its inside). Move the wiring harness of PS07 to

the outside of the right side plate.

F Remove the fixation unit. (Set screws 4 pcs)

Pull it out by this length.

Alignment adjusting screw

Fixing sheet metal

Fixation unit

Pull it out by this

length.



8-29




8-30

8.2.13 Replacing the Wheel Unit and Clutch ASSY

<Removal>


2 Open the clamshell.

3 Remove the process cartridge.

4 Remove the transcription separator. See Section 8.2.23.

5 Unplug the connector (motor part 2 pcs)

6 Loosen the bolt on the tension drum plate, move the plate to the left, and retighten the

screw to set the plate.

Clamshell

Tension drum plate set screw

Timing drum (belt)

Boss (wound) Pulley (64)

Process cartridge

The connector of

procedure 5



8-31


7 Remove the timing drum (belt).

8 Remove the boss (wound). (hexagon socket set screw 2 pcs)

9 Remove the pulley (64).

0 Remove the boss stopper. (hexagon socket set screw 2 pcs)

A Remove the drum gear.

B Remove the support (left drum). (inner set screw 2 pcs, outer set screw 1 pc)

Boss stopper

Drum gear

Support (left drum)



8-32

C Remove the wheel unit. (set screw 4 pcs)

D Unplug the connector from each clutch ASSY (2 pcs). (1 pc each)E Remove the clutch ASSY.

Clutch assemblyClutch assembly

Wheel unit

This screw is longer than others. Use care in the installation not to mistake

it for others (Printed as LS on the sheet metal).



8-33


8.2.14 Replacing the Main Motor

<Removal>

1 Remove the wheel unit. See Section 8.2.13.

2 Remove the tension spring.

3 Loosen the four set screws and move up and down the main motor, loosen the timing belt.

4 Remove the main motor. (set screw 4 pcs)

Main motor

Tension spring



8-34

8.2.15 Replacing the Transport (suction).

<Removal>

1 Remove the right upper cover. (Set screws 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1.

2 Open the clamshell. See Section 8.2.13 2.

3 Remove the process cartridge. See Section 8.2.13 3.

4 Remove the transfer separator. (equipped with a hook at the right.)

5 Unplug the two connectors from the transport ASSY.

Transfer separator

Connector (Blue)

Connector (White)



8-35


6 Remove the transport ASSY. (set screw, left/right 1 pc each)

Note: Care must be exercised in removing the transport ASSY so that PS06

may not be broken.

Transport ASSY Connector



8-36

8.2.16 Replacing the Halogen Lamp on Fuser Unit

<Removal>

1 Remove the fuser unit. See Section 8.2.12.

2 Unplug connectors from both sides of the halogen lamp and remove the right and left fuser

holders. (set screw 1 pc each)

Fuser holder (left)

Fuser holder (right)

3 Remove the stopper (heat roll).

4 Pull out the halogen lamp.

Note: Pay attention not to touch the transparent glass of the halogen lamp

during the work. If you touch the glass, wipe it with a rag dampened with

alcohol.

<Installation>

Note When installing, fit the halogen lamp securely. Don't leave it in loosened

state.

After replacement, adjust the alignment again. -> 9.4.2 Adjusting the Skew/Slack



8-37


8.2.17 Replacing the BL01 ASSY (suction fan)

<Removal>

1 Remove the transport. See Section 8.2.15.

2 Unplug the connector,

3 Remove the fan. (set screw 2 pcs, connector 1 pc)

Connector

Cut off this portion for older models

(it interferes with the sheet metal in

the rear side).



8-38

8.2.18 Replacing the Thermistor on Fixation

<Removal>

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1

2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2

3 Remove the front cover. (set screw 9 pcs) * 7 pcs in Rev. D

4 Remove the fan unit. (set screw 5 pcs, fan connector 1 pc) See Section 8.2.12 8

* If it is bundled with Insulock tie, cut Insulock tie.

5 Remove the fixation cover. (set screw 3 pcs)

6 Unscrew the set screws and remove the thermistors.

Note: Plug the red connectors in the left thermistor shown in the picture above.

Note: If the fan unit was bundled with Insulock tie, bundle it likewise in installa-

tion, too.

Enlarged figure

This thermister is connected to

the red connector.



8-39


8.2.19 Replacing the Fan on Fuser

<Removal>



3 Remove the front cover. (set screw 9 pcs) See Section 8.2.12 3. * 7 pcs in Rev. D

4 Unplug the connector. (1 pc each)

5 Remove the fan. (set screw, 2 pcs each)



8-40

8.2.20 Replacing the Charger Fan

<Removal>




4 Remove the top cover. (set screw 6 pcs)

5 Close the clamshell.

6 Remove the plate spring and bracket clamshell (2 pcs each). (Set screws 1 pc on each side)

Plate spring (it is

tightened together with

the bracket clamshell)

Plate spring

Enlarged view



8-41



* Open the clamshell slowly while pushing it.

8 Remove the charge elimination ASSY. (set screws 3 pcs and connector 1 pc) See Section

8.2.24.

Charge elimination

ASSY

9 Remove the fan. ( set screw 2 pcs each) (connector 1 pc)

Note When closing the clamshell after replacing the fan, care must be used to

prevent the ferrite core bumping against the developer unit.



8-42

8.2.21 Replacing the Process Unit

<Removal>


2 Pull out and remove the process unit.

Process unit



8-43


8.2.22 Replacing the LED Head

• In the case of PL model

<Removal>




4 Pull out and remove the process unit. See Section 8.2.21 2.



7 Remove the two plate springs and the two bracket clamshells. (set screw left/right 1 pc

each.)

Plate spring

Plate spring (it is

tightened together with

the bracket clamshell)

Enlarged view



8-44


* Open the clamshell slowly while pushing it.

9 Unplug the three connectors of LED head.

0 Remove the right and left move guides. (set screw 2 pcs each)

A Remove the LED head

Note: After the replacement of LED head, the LED head joint must be adjusted.

For details, see Section 9.6 "Adjusting the LED Head Joint."

Guide (MOVE)



8-45


• In the case of MF model

<Removal>

1 Remove the developer unit

2 Install the pinch unit. (Set screw 4 pcs)

To install the pinch unit easier, change the screw position on the side to keep the clamshell

open.

3 Remove the cable of the LED head.

Close the clamshell and then remove the LED head cable through the device back face.

Change the screw position

Pinch unit



8-46

4 Remove the LED head. (Set screws 4 pcs)

Return the screw being moved in step 2 to the original position and then fully open the

clamshell. Remove LED-MOVE on both sides and then take out the LED head. Care must be

exercised in removing LED-MOVE so that the LED head may not be inadvertently dropped.

<Installation>

1 Install LED-HEAD and fix it with LED-MOVE of both sides.

2 Close the clamshell and then connect 4 LED head cables through the back face.

3 Remove the pinch unit.

Modify the fixing position on both sides and then partially open the clamshell. Remove the

pinch unit. (Set screws 4 pcs)

4 Install the developer unit.

Note Don't fully open the clamshell while the developer unit is removed.

Otherwise, FR4 and FR5 can be disengaged.

Be sure that the pinch unit has been installed before opening the

clamshell fully.

Restore the original screw position



8-47


8.2.23 Replacing the Transfer Separator

<Removal>

1 Remove the process unit.

2 Remove the transfer separator by unlatching the two hooks.

Installation

Note: Check the transfer separator is correctly fixed to the specified position.

Note: Whenever installing the transfer separator, be sure to insert its left side

first.



8-48

8.2.24 Replacing the Charge Elimination ASSY (charge elimination LED)

<Removal>





5 Remove the charge elimination ASSY. (Set screws 3 pcs and connector 1 pc)

Charge elimination

ASSY



8-49


8.2.25 Replacing the Developer

<Removal>




4 Pull out and remove the process unit. See Section 8.2.21 2.

5 Remove the top cover. (set screw 6 pcs each)


7 Change fixing positions of right and left stoppers.



8-50

8 Unplug the connector.

9 Open the buffer door.


A Remove the registration pinch frame.(set screw 4 pcs)

Buffer door

Registration pinch frame

Connnector



8-51


B Remove the clamped cable.

The cable is clamped

on the backside of

this portion.

C Remove the rear cover. (set screw 5 pcs)

D Remove the left DEV angle and right DEV angle. (set screw 1 pc each)

E Remove the developer.

Rear cover

Right DEV angleLeft DEV angle



8-52

8.2.26 Replacing the Developer DV Spacer

<Removal>

1 Remove the developer.

2 Remove the stopper and wave washer from the developer right side. (set screw 2 pcs)

3 Remove the gear from the developer left side.

1. Remove the E-ring of gear (idler 2) .

2. Remove the gear (idler 2).

3. Remove the gear (idler 1).

4. Remove the E-ring of gear (magnet roll).

5. Remove the gear (magnet roll).

6. Remove the screw (2 pcs).

7. Remove the bearing.

4 Remove the DV spacer.

1. Remove the gear (magnet roll).

2. Remove the DV spacer.

<Installation>

Note: The gear (magnet roll) has front and back faces. Mount the gear with its

light-blue face.

E-ring of gear (magnet roll)

DV spacerScrew

Bearing

Wave washer

Gear (idler 1)

Stopper

E-ring of gear (idler 2)

Gear (idler 1)



8-53


8.2.27 Replacing the Developer Blade

Note: The toner may spill out during the work. Lay the cover such as newspa-

per on the floor.

<Removal>1 Remove the magnet roller. See Section 8.2.26 4.

Place the removed magnet roller as shown in the picture.

2 Remove the developer blade.

1. Remove the left and right screws (total 2 pcs) from the blade holder.

2. Remove the blade together with the holder.

3. Loosen the set screw from the blade plate.

4. Remove the blade.



8-54

<Installation>

Note: After a new blade is mounted to the blade holder, apply the toner to the

blade tip.

Before installing the blade assembly, remove the toner from the magnet

roller and developer chassis using a vacuum cleaner.

Apply the

toner over the

entire blade

tip.

Remove the toner from

the developer chassis.



8-55


8.2.28 Replacing the INT1 (Upper Door Interlock Switch)

<Removal>



3 Remove the INT1.

1. Unplug the connector.

2. Disconnect the INT1.

INT1



8-56

8.2.29 Replacing the INT3 (Buffer Door Interlock Switch)

<Removal>


2 Open the buffer door. (remove the two thumb screws.)

3 Disconnect the INT3.

4 Remove the bracket (INT3) (set screw 2 pcs)

5 Remove the INT3.

Buffer door

INT3



8-57


8.2.30 Replacing the Paper Registration Sensor

<Removal>

1 Open the buffer door.


3 Remove the registration pinch frame. See Section 8.2.25 0.

4 Unplug the connector and remove the PS05.



8-59


8.2.32 Replacing the Control Panel

<Removal>


2 Remove the control panel.


2. Remove the two set screws.



8-60

8.2.33 Replacing the Roll Paper Feed Motors (FM01and FM02)

<Removal>

(Procedures shown below are common to upper, middle, and lower trays.)

1 Remove the roll paper feed unit:

1. Pull out the roll door.

2. Remove the roll paper feed unit. (set screw 4 pcs)

Note: Place the roll paper feed unit with the handle-attached face downward.

2 Remove the motor.


2. Remove the two set screws.

3. Remove the motor.

FM01(FM02)



8-61


<Installation>

When installing the roll paper feed unit, fix it with screws as shown below.

1 Fix the left side of the roll paper feed unit in 2 positions.

2 Close the roll paper feed unit once and then open it slightly again. Then fix a position in the

front right side of the roll paper feed unit with a screw.

3 Open the roll paper feed unit fully and screw-fix a position in the back of the unit.



8-62

8.2.34 Replacing the Sensors on Roll Paper Feed Unit (PS11, PS12, PS21, PS22, PS31, and

PS32)

PS11 ASSY ( Roll 1 paper end sensor 1)

PS12 ASSY ( Roll 2 paper end sensor 1)

PS21 ASSY ( Roll 1 door switch)

PS22 ASSY ( Roll 2 door switch)

<Removal>

1 Pull out the roll 1 and roll 2 doors.

2 Remove PS31 and PS32.

Remove PS21 and PS22.

Remove PS11 and PS12.

1. Unplug the connector from each sensor.

2. Remove the relevant sensors.

When the roll door cover is removed by unscrewing the four set screws and the latch metal isremoved by unscrewing the set screw, PS21 and PS22 can easily be removed.

PS21,22PS11,12



8-63


8.2.35 Replacing the Gas Spring

<Removal>

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1. 1

2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1. 23 Remove the E-ring and set screw, and remove the gas spring.

Note When replacing the gas springs, do it one by one starting with the right

side (or left side) one. Don't remove the gas springs on both sides at one

time.

Gas spring



8-64

8.2.36 Replacing the heat roller

<Removal>

1 Remove the fixation unit. See Section 8.2.12.

2 Remove the halogen lamp. See Section 8.2.16.

3 Remove the stay (motor HM). (Set screws 2 pcs)

4 Remove the ejector (top) assembly. (KL clip 1 pc)

5 Remove the cover (heat roller). (Set screws 2 pcs)

6 Remove the ejector (top) assembly retaining spring. (Retaining spring 1 pc and set screw 1 pc

on each side)

7 Remove the paper guide (bottom) assembly. (Set screws 2 pcs)

Stay (motor HM)

Ejector (top) assembly

KL clip

Cover (heat roller)

Ejector (top)

assembly retaining

panel

Paper guide

(bottom) assembly



8-65


8 Remove gear (Z35-Z15) and gear (Z19) on the left side of the fixation unit. (E-ring 2 pcs)

9 Remove the stopper (heat roller) on the left side of the fixation unit. (Pawls in 2 positions are

engaged with the heat roller)

0 Remove the gear (heat roller).

A Remove the stopper (heat roller) on the right side of the fixation unit. (Pawls in 2 positions are

engaged with the heat roller)

B Remove the spacer (sleeve). (Right side alone)

C Remove the sleeve (heat roller). (1 pc on each side)

D Remove the bearing (heat roller). (1 pc on each side)

Gear (Z35-Z15)

Gear (Z19)

Gear (heat roller)

Stopper (heat roller)

Bearing (heat roller)

Sleeve (heat roller)

Spacer (sleeve)

Stopper (heat roller)

Gear (Z19)



8-66

E Remove the heat roller.

Note When assembling a new heat roller, clean the entire heat roller surface

with HR cleaner.



8-67


<Removal>

1 Remove the fixation unit. See Section 8.2.12.

2 Remove the halogen lamp. See Section 8.2.16.

3 Remove the heat roller. See Section 8.2.36.

4 Remove the cover (FU top) assembly. (Set screws 3 pcs)

5 Remove the lever (cam). (Set screw 1 pc)

6 Remove the holder (shaft L) and holder (shaft R). (E-ring 2 pcs on each side)

Backup roller assembly

Holder (shaft R)

* Holder (shaft L) is

provided on the

opposite side (left

side)

Lever (cam)

Cover (FU top)

assembly



8-68

7 Remove the fame (FU top) assembly. (Set screws 4 pcs. It is allowed to leave the cables on the

frame.)

Frame (FU top) assembly

Bearing (backup roller)

C-ring

Shaft (backup roller)

Backup roller assembly

8 Remove the backup roller assembly.

9 Remove C-ring and then remove bearing (backup roller). (2 pcs on each side)

0 Remove the shaft (backup roller).

Note Even if the backup roller may be cooled down, the shat (backup roller)

sometimes remains hot. Be careful to avoid burn.



8-69


8.2.38 Cleaning Primary Wire

Table 8-1 Maintenance Priority

• Necessary tools

a.Screwdriver (+)

b. Swabs

c. Ethanol (99.5%)

d. Cotton Ciegal

EthanolSwabs Cotton Ciegal

Black Line

Black Belt

(Media Feed direction)

Black Spot

Black Line

(Roll Width Direction)Fog

(Background Cloud)

Uneven Image Density

White Spot,

White Line

(Roll Width Direction)

Partial Lacking

(Media Feed direction)

Black Copy

Clean

WIRE

(CHARGER)

Clean

BLADE

(CHARGER)

Exchange

WIRE

(CHARGER)

Exchange

BLADE

(CHARGER)

Exchange

Process

Cartridge

1st

1st

1st

1st

1st

1st

1st

2nd

2nd

2nd

2nd

2nd

2nd

3rd

3rd

3rd

3rd

3rd

4th 5th



8-70

1 Remove case (CASE (CHARGER)ASSY). (Two setscrews)

2 The wire (WIRE (CHARGER) can be seen.

WIRE (CHARGER)

Note: Do not touch the wire by hand. If touched, clean the wire by swabs

wetted by ethanol.

WIRE (CHARGER)

CASE (CHARGER)



8-71


3 Clean the wire (WIRE(CHARGER)).

(1) Prepare two swabs wetted by ethanol.

(2) Nip the Wire by two swabs wetted by ethanol.

(3) Move the two swabs right and left.

Note: a. You may clean the wire even when you have only one swab. See

pictures below.

b. Be careful not to cut or bend the wire.

c. Do not touch the wire by hand. If touched, clean the wire by swabs

wetted by ethanol.

(Example of cleaning by two swabs)

(Example of cleaning by one swab)

4 After cleaning, put CASE (CHARGER) on initial position and fix it with two setscrews.

WIRE (CHARGER)



8-72

8.2.39 Exchanging Primary Wire

• Necessary tools and part

a.Screwdriver (+)

b. Tweezers

c. Ethanol (99.5%)

d. Cotton Ciegal

e. WIRE (CHARGER)

Note: Do not touch the wire by hand. If touched, clean the wire by swabs wetted

by ethanol.

1 Remove case (CASE (CHARGER)). (Two setscrews)

2 The wire (WIRE (CHARGER) can be seen.

CASE (CHARGER)

WIRE (CHARGER) WIRE (CHARGER)

Cotton Ciegal

Ethanol Tweezers Cotton ciegal



8-73


3 Detaching tired Primary Wire

(1) Pick SPRING (CHARGER) by tweezers, and unhook from support.

(2) Pick the other side (fixed side) by tweezers, and unhook from support.



8-74

4 Attaching new Primary Wire

(1) Prepare detached SPRING (CHARGER) and new WIRE (CHARGER).

(2) Pick one terminal of the Wire by tweezers, and hook it onto support.

SPRING (CHARGER) WIRE (CHARGER)

(3) Hook another terminal of the Wire with SPRING (CHARGER), and hook it onto

support.

Note: Pick SPRING (CHARGER) by tweezers as below to make the procedure

easier.



8-75


(4) Check whether bent or soiled wire has been attached to the process cartridge or not.

Note: If the wire is soiled, clean it again. If the wire is bent, replace it again.

(5) After Exchanging, put CASE (CHARGER) on initial position and fix it with two

setscrews.

WIRE (CHARGER)

Note: Be careful not to bend the PLATE (CLEANER_FG) fixed to the

BLADE(CLEANER) with setscrew.

Make sure the PLATE (CLEANER_FG) correctly touch to the CASE

(CHARGER).

CASE (CHARGER)

PLATE(CLEANER_FG)



8-76

8.2.40 Cleaning and Exchanging Cleaner Blade

• Necessary tools

a. Screwdriver (+)

b. Adjust Gauge : JIGU(CLEANER BLADE)

c. Ethanol (99.5%)

d. Cotton Ciegal

e. Vaccume cleaner for toners

1 Remove five setscrews, and detach BLADE(CLEANER).

Adjust Gauge

Note: BLADE(CLEANER) consists of an aluminum holder and a blade rubber.

Do not touch the blade rubber by hands.

If touched, clean the blade rubber by Cotton Ciegal wetted by ethanol.

Vacuum the toner on the blade rubber with the Vacuum cleaner fortoners.

BLADE (CLEANER)

Five setscrews and two plates

BLADE (CLEANER)

BLADE (CLEANER)

Blade rubber Aluminum holder



8-77


2 Wipe blade rubber by Cotton Ciegal.

Note: If the blade rubber is strongly soiled, use Cotton Ciegal wetted by ethanol.

If the blade rubber is damaged or cannot be cleaned any more, replace

BLADE (CLEANER).

3 After cleaning, sprinkle new toner for lubrication on the blade rubber.

Wipe some toner off from the development sleeve with cotton ciegal.

Brush the blade rubber with the cotton ciegal to spread toner.

Blade rubber

Blade rubber

Aluminum holder

Blade rubber

Spread toner here.

BLADE (CLEANER)



8-78

4 Attach cleaner blade to initial position and fix it with five setscrews. Press the blade against

the adjust gauge to fix.

Note: Keep just 2mm (0.08 inch) of gap between blade and chassis at left, mid-

left, center, mid-right and right.

Keep space with the adjust gauge and press the blade against the gauge.

Fix the blade with screws in the following order: center, mid-left, mid-right,

left-end and right-end, or in reverse order as center, mid-right, mid-left,

right-end and left-end.

Adjust GaugeBLADE (CLEANER)

2 (+/-0.2) mm0.08 (+/-0.008) inch

BLADE(CLEANER)

Waste toner bottle

Note: Do not spread new toner on the blade rubber while blade rubber is wetted

right after cleaning by ethanol.

Use new toner for spreading on the blade rubber. Do not use waste

toner.



8-79


5 After cleaner blade is attached, clean toner around the process cartridge.

BLADE (CLEANER)



8-80

8.2.41 Cleaning of OPC Photosensitive drum

1 Remove the process cartridge.

2 Place the process cartridge on the table directing its grip downward.

3 Repackage OPC cleaner into a smaller sized container and then apply an appropriate amount

of it to a piece soft cloth such as cotton ciegal.

4 Clean the photosensitive drum surface.



8-81


5 Rotate the gear section of the photosensitive drum with hand and then rotate the

photosensitive drum in the paper feed direction.

6 Repeat above steps 4 and 5.



Chapter 9 Adjustment

9-1


This chapter describes how to adjust each part of the engine in this device.

9.1 Adjusting the Voltage and Current of High Voltage Power Unit

Method of adjusting the primary charger load current, developer AC bias, developer DC bias,

transfer unit load current, and separator AC bias are described.



9-2

9.1.1 Adjusting the Primary Charger Load Current

1 Remove front cover.

2 Insert the tester probes into the CH1 terminals, and operate the primary charger with the

maintenance code <09> "01" in the engine maintenance mode (⇒see Section 2.3.9) to

measure the load current Icc of the charging wire.

For the measurement, use the DC voltage as a measuring position of the tester, and read

100 µA for 100 mV.

3 If the adjustment is necessary, rotate the CH1 control using a screwdriver for power supply

adjustment.

Setting range: -865 to -935 µA (Reading of tester = 0.865 to 0.935 V)

Target value: -900 µA (Reading of tester = 0.9 V)

CH1 terminals




9-3

9.1.2 Developer AC Bias


2 Insert the tester probes into the CH2AC terminals, and operate the developer AC bias with

the maintenance code <09> "02" in the engine maintenance mode (⇒see Section 2.3.9) to

measure the AC load current Vdba.

For the measurement, use the AC voltage as a measuring position of the tester, and read

100 V for 100 mV.

3 If the adjustment is necessary, rotate the CH2AC control using a screwdriver for power

supply adjustment.

Setting range: 1.40 to 1.50 Vp-p (Reading of tester: 0.625 to 0.675 V)

Target value: 1.45 kVp-p (Reading of tester: 0.65 V)

CH1 terminals



9-4

9.1.3 Developer DC Bias

Note: The developer DC bias must be adjusted after the developer AC bias was

adjusted.

1 Remove front cover.2 Insert the tester probes into the CH2DC terminals, and operate the developer DC bias with

the maintenance code <09> "02" in the engine maintenance mode (⇒see Section 2.3.9) to

measure the DC load current Vdba.


100 V for 100 mV.

3 When adjustment is needed, do it by turning the CH2DC adjusting volume using the

screwdriver for the power supply adjustment.

Setting range: -270 to -290 V (Reading of tester: 0.27 to 0.29 V)

Target value: -280 V (Reading of tester: 0.28 V)

CH2DC terminal




9-5

9.1.4 Transfer Load Current


2 Insert the tester probes into the CH3 terminals, and operate the transfer with the

maintenance code <09> "03" in the engine maintenance mode (⇒see Section 2.3.9) to

measure the load current Itcd of the transfer wire.


100 µA for 100 mV.

3 When adjustment is needed, do it by turning the CH3 adjusting volume using the

screwdriver for the power supply adjustment.

Setting range: 570 to 630 µA (Reading of tester: 0.570 to 0.630 V)

Target value: 600 µA (Reading of tester: 0.6 V)

CH3 terminal



9-6

9.1.5 Separator AC Bias


2 Insert the tester terminal into the CH4 terminal on the high voltage power unit, use the

maintenance code <09>"04" (see Section 2.3.9) of the engine maintenance mode to

operate the separator AC bias, and measure the AC load voltage Vdca. On the tester, select

the AC voltage measurement position and read 1 V as 1000 V.

Note DC voltage must be used in the tester setting position.

3 If the adjustment is needed, turn the CH4 control volume using a flat blade screwdriver,

which is specialized for adjustment of power unit, to adjust the voltage.

Setting range: 12.0 to 13.0 Vp-p (Reading of tester: 4.3 to 4.7 V)

Target value: 12.5 kVp-p (Reading of tester: 4.5 V)

CH4 terminal




9-7

9.2 Verification and Adjustment Voltage of Low voltage Power Unit

This section covers verification procedures for the voltage of the low-voltage power unit.


2 According to the voltage you want to check, insert the tester terminal to TP1 to TP4 pins.

Voltage value 24 V ± 1.2 V : TP1 (24 V), TP2 (GND)

Voltage value 5.1 V ± 0.005 V : TP3 (5.1 V), TP4 (GND)

Note DC voltage must be used in the tester setting position.

3 When adjustment +5.1 V is needed, do it by turning the adjustment volume (VR71) using

the screwdriver for the power supply adjustment.

TP4 TP3VR71 TP1 TP2



9-8

9.3 Adjusting the Light Emitting STB Width of LED Head

As each LED head has different light quantity, if the LED head is replaced, the light emitting

STB width and the density change width must be set.The LED light quantity label has been attached to the LED head, and therefore set the light

emitting STB width and the density change width following the light quantity given on the label.

For setting the light emitting STB width and the density change width, select the maintenance

code <12>, subcode "731 - 739" in the maintenance mode. For the setting procedure, see 2.3.12.

After setting, execute the engine test print (maintenance code <10>) to check that normal plotting

is outputted.

Hint: In case of a print quality failure such as uneven density and variations in line

thickness, try to set larger STB value than the value listed in the

corresponding table.

Table 9-1 Corresponding Table between LED Light Quantity and Light Emitting STB Value

Average lightquantity

STBvalue

STBwidth

Average lightquantity

STBvalue

STBwidth

1.100 28 5 1.310 24 4

1.110 28 5 1.320 24 4

1.120 28 5 1.330 23 4

1.130 28 5 1.340 23 4

1.140 27 5 1.350 23 4

1.150 27 5 1.360 23 4

1.160 27 4 1.370 23 4

1.170 27 4 1.380 23 4

1.180 26 4 1.390 22 4

1.190 26 4 1.400 22 41.200 26 4 1.410 22 4

1.210 26 4 1.420 22 4

1.220 26 4 1.430 22 4

1.230 25 4 1.440 22 4

1.240 25 4 1.450 22 4

1.250 25 4 1.460 21 4

1.260 25 4 1.470 21 4

1.270 25 4 1.480 21 4

1.280 24 4 1.490 21 3

1.290 24 4 1.500 21 3

1.300 24 4

Observing the average light quantity of the LED head, set the HEAD_A, B, C from the above table.

Then, perform the test print of "2 by 2" vertically to check that there is no density difference.

(If the error diffusion data can be outputted, also print the error diffusion data for checking.)

If different, change the STB width of HEAD_A, C to adjust the density. At this time, select the

STB width according to the STB value from the following table and enter it.

STB value STB width STB value STB width21 4 32 6

22 4 33 6

23 4 34 6

24 4 35 6

25 4 36 6

26 4 37 6

27 5 38 7

28 5 39 7

29 5 40 7

30 5 41 7

31 5 42 7




9-9

9.4 Adjusting the Plotting Specification Items

The items that do not satisfy the reference values in "7.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a

Plotting Specification Failure" and other adjustment items are listed in Table 9-2.Referring to the corresponding items in Table 9-2, enter the engine maintenance mode to adjust,

or take corrective measures following the reference sections.

Table 9-2 Adjustment Items in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure

* Items to be adjusted in the engine maintenance mode.

Select maintenance code <12> if the condition and value to be adjusted are known in advance.

Select maintenance code <11> if the adjustment is performed after test print and measurement.

Item Control

(adjustment) item

Outputlength for

adjustment

Output paperwidth for

adjustment

Output paper type foradjustment

Print engine testpattern

Adjustment of

fixation nip pressure

Pressure of the

pressure roller 400 mm A0 Normal paper No.5

Adjustment: See Section 9.4.1.

Adjustment of

skew/slackness

Fixation position 1189 mm A0 Normal paper No.15


Cut squareness

Cutter mount

height 1189 mm A0 Normal paper No.15


Cut length accuracy*

– 1189 mm A0 Normal paper / tracing

paper (75 g) / film

No.15– 297 mm A0 Normal paper / tracing

paper (75 g) / film


paper (75 g) / film

Remarks: Default value varies depending on the print length and type of paper roll (unit: line).

The cut length is reduced if numeric value is increased (1 line = 0.042333 mm).

When the set value is increased, the cut length will be decreased. (1 line = 0.042333 mm)


Print length

accuracy*

– 1189 mm A0 Normal paper No.15

Remarks: The print length is reduced if numeric value is increased.

(About ±3.3 mm per 841 mm is reduced if there is a ±5 Hz change)


Top edge

registration*


paper (75 g) / film

No.15– 297 mm A0 Normal paper / tracing

paper (75 g) / film


paper (75 g) / film

Remarks: Default value varies depending on the print length and type of paper roll (unit: msec).

The print start position reverses if numeric value is increased (10 msec = 0.8 mm).


Center registration*

– 1189 mm A0 Normal paper No.15

Remarks: The print position is shifted to the left if numeric value is increased (1 byte = 0.508 mm).


Checking SkewFixation position 1189 mm A0 Normal paper No.15




9-10

9.4.1 Adjusting the Fixation Nip Pressure

- Immediately after the operation, the fixation and hexagon head screws are

hot. So, keep away from these parts. Otherwise, you may be burned.

Care must be exercised in the adjustment to avoid burn.

1 Set the A1 roll paper (normal paper) in roll 1 (upper drawer).

2 Enter the engine maintenance mode and perform the maintenance code <09>"07," "08" or

"09" (see Section 2.3.9). Test prints are output.

3 Measure the black band, which is printed at the position 30 to 40 cm away from the top

edge of the test print, at both sides. (See the figure below.)

Reference value: Width of the black band = 7.5 ± 0.5 mm

Difference between left and right = ± 0.5 mm or less

4 When the value is deviated from the standard value, open the top door (door 6) and adjust it byturning the nip adjustment screws being provided on both sides of the fixation unit (first loosen

the nut that is fixing the nip adjustment screws).

5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the adjusting meet the reference values.

6 Retighten the nut loosened in the previous steps to adjust the nip pressure.

Fixation adjustment

screw

WARNING

7.5±0.5 mm 7.5±0.5 mm

25 mm 25 mm

30 to 40 cm

P a p

er f e e d

d i r e c t i on

Turning the screw clockwise :

Decreases the nip pressure.

Turning the screw counterclockwise :

Increases the nip pressure.




9-11

9.4.2 Adjusting the Skew/Slack

- Don't touch the fixation and hexagon head screw right after the operation.

These components become hot and may result in burns.

Care must be exercised in the adjustment to avoid burn.

1 Set the A0 roll paper (normal paper) in roll 1 (upper drawer).

2 Turn on the engine maintenance mode and check the nip voltage for appropriateness. If it is

off the standard value, adjust it. see Section 9.4.1 Adjusting the Fixation Nip Pressure.

3 Print 3 copies of the engine test pattern No.5 consecutively.

(see Section 2.3.10 Maintenance Code 10 "PRINT" (Print) Engine maintenance code

<10>"05")

4 Check the rear end of the roll for smear without registration (several millimeters wide

wedge-shaped horizontal lines).

5 If a smear appears, remove the right upper cover, left upper cover, front cover, cover

(FDL), cover (FDR) and manual feed drawer from the device body. Insert papers between

the open/close sensors for the fixation door and the manual feed drawer to simulate the

closed state of the door. Then adjust the fixation unit alignment and the heat roller speed.

a) If horizontal lines of the smear are conspicuous on the right side of a print sample

(right side of the device)

-> Push the right side of the fixation unit toward backside of the device.

WARNING

b) If horizontal lines of the smear are conspicuous on the left side of a print sample (left

side of the device)

-> Pull the right side of the fixation unit toward front side the device.

P a p er f e e d

d i r e c t i o

n

13cm

P a p er f e e d

d i r e c t i on

13cm



9-12

Note Be sure to loosen 2 set screws on the fixation unit before adjusting.

Use the alignment adjustingscrew for the adjustment.

Clockwise turn: Pushes back the

right side of the fixation unit

Counterclockwise turn: Pulls out

the right side of the fixation unit

1) Mark the initial positions of the top and bottom screws fixing the fixation unit on the

right side plate.

2) Turning the alignment adjusting screw, move the fixation unit until the horizontal lines

of the smear are moved to the left side. (Try to move about 1 mm from the original

position, though the distance depends on the magnitude of the smear.)

3) Mark the screw position as the horizontal lines of the smear are moved to the left side.

4) Fine-control the alignment between the original position and the position being

recorded as the lines are moved to the left side.

* Turning the alignment adjusting screw may not immediately move the fixation unit.

Thus, it is advisable to move the unit while observing the move of the screw-fixed

portions at the top and bottom of the fixation unit on the right side plate.

(Above can be done easier by removing the screw and observing move of the screw hole.)

And the screw-fixed portion at the top of the fixation unit may sometimes not follow

that of the bottom portion. In such case, retry the operation after loosening the duct set

screws on the fixation unit.

* When the alignment adjustment alone is not enough for adjusting wrinkles or missed

print, adjust the heat roller speed. (Modify the default value by ±10 or ±20)

(See Section 2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Parameter) Table 2-4

Engine Control Parameter List (3/4))




9-13

c) If horizontal lines of a smear are conspicuous across the full width a print sample

Increase the heat roller speed.

Modify the heat roller speed control parameter by +10 or +20 from the default value.

6 Repeat above adjustment and printing until the smear without registration becomes

inconspicuous on No.5 test print. Then check No.14 test print for irregularities of the lines

in a space 13 mm or so away from the rear end.

* Adjustment of skew/sag is basically completed with No.5. Thus, if further adjustmentis needed in spite of the adjustment made in No.5, adjust the heat roller speed. If the

speed adjustment doesn’t solve the problem, readjust referencing the results of No.5

and No.14.

7 Tighten 2 fixation unit set screws.

8 Use A1 size for the adjustment.

As the adjustment with A0 size is completed, generate 3 copies of No.5 test print

consecutively in the same manner.

* Even when the smear was found on A1 size, first adjust with A0 size.If a smear appears at any place or size on the print sample, modify the heat roller

speed control parameter by -10 or -20 from the default value.

* Adjustment of skew/sag is basically completed with A0 size. Thus, if further

adjustment was needed with A1 size, support it by adjusting the heat roller speed.

If the speed adjustment could not eliminate the problem, proceed to readjustment

referencing the results of A1 and A0 size.

P a p

er f e e d

d i r e c t i on

13cm



9-14

9.4.3 Adjusting the Cut Squareness

1 Set the A0 roll paper (normal paper) in the roll 1 (upper drawer).

2 Enter the engine maintenance mode and output engine test pattern 15. (maintenance code

<10> "15," see Section 2.3.10.)

3 Measure the cut squareness. For measuring method and reference value, see "No. 7" in

Section 7.2.1.

4 If the standard value is met, remove the cutter cover and then loosen 2 screws on both side

and 1 screw at the center.

5 While moving up and down the cutter mounting brackets (at a rough estimate), adjust the

cutter mounting height.

6 Tighten the screws to fix.

7 After repeating steps 2 through 6, adjust until the measured value satisfies the referencevalue.

Cutter mounting sheet metal




9-15

9.4.4 Adjusting the Cut Length Accuracy

Select the maintenance code <11>, subcode "04" in the maintenance mode if performing the

adjustment after the test print and measurement. ⇒See item (1) below.

Select maintenance code <12>, subcode "801 - 848" in the maintenance mode if the condition

and value to be adjusted are known in advance. ⇒See item (2) below.

This paragraph outlines adjustment procedures and explains supplementary operations. For

concrete operating procedures (LCD display and key operation) in the engine maintenance

mode, see "2.3.11 Maintenance Code <11> "REGULATE" (Adjustment) ," "2.3.12

Maintenance Code <12> "PARAMETER" (Parameter)" or "2.3.13 Maintenance Code

<13> "NVRAM" (NVRAM)."

(1) When the cut length is adjusted and measured after the test print:

This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data are set to defaults.

1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select maintenance code <11>.

2 Select subcode "11< 04> Cut-Length."

3 Select the roll paper and print length test conditions.

Note: For the first test print, do not change the preset correction value, i.e. use

default value as it is.

4 Output the print of subcode "04."

Three sheets are outputted continuously.

5 Measure the paper length of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the

specification.

For the measuring method and reference value, see 7.2.1 No.6.

OK if within the specification.

- Repeat steps 3 and 4, when further making a check under other test conditions.

- Go to step 9 when finishing the test.

If out of the specification, change the preset correction value and adjust. ⇒Go to step 6.

6 To change the correction value, calculate the new value as shown in the example below.

Example 1: When the paper length is short. (The actual sheet length is 1182 mm although the

reference value, A0 = 1189±6 mm.)

1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference value:

1182 - 1189 = - 7 mm

2. Calculate the number of print lines equivalent to the difference

(1 line = 0.0423 mm):- 7 ÷ 0.04213 = -165.8 lines ⇒ -165 lines



9-16

3. Check the value saved in NVRAM.

* The default is determined by the print length and roll paper specifications.

4. Calculate the correction value and enter the result:

300 lines - 165 lines = 135 lines

7 Output the test print of subcode "04." Three sheets are output continuously.

8 Measure the length of the third sheet and check whether the paper length meets the

requirement. If the value is acceptable, save it in NVRAM.

(2) If the cut length is adjusted when the condition and value to be adjusted are known in

advance:

This adjustment will be effective, for instance, when the user requests the cut length of plain

paper A2 to be reduced or extended by certain millimeters.


2 Enter the subcode (engine control parameter) number.

- Select the subcode suitable for the print length and roll paper conditions.

3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) into the number of lines to determine the correction

value. For the calculation method, see step 6 of Paragraph (1) above.

4 When you want to change the test conditions to adjust the cut length, repeat steps 2 and 3

above.

5 Save the correction value in NVRAM.

6 Execute the print with maintenance code <11> and subcode "04," and check the cut length

after adjustment.

- Check all codes with which the cut length was adjusted.

- Adjust the print condition to the test condition of the codes used for adjustment.

For the print executing method, see 2.3.11.





9-17

9.4.5 Adjusting the Plotting Length Accuracy

Select maintenance code <11>, subcode "03" in the maintenance mode if performing the




This paragraph outlines adjustment procedure and explains, supplementary operations. For





Hint: The type and width of the paper used are A1 width of plain paper.

However, if the user's paper use condition is limited, the adjustment may be

performed under that condition.

(1) When the plotting length is adjusted and measured after the test print:

This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data is set to default. Only

the roll paper is subject to adjustment of print length. To adjust the A4 cut paper, follow the

procedures in item (2).


2 Select subcode "11<03> plotting -Length."3 Select the roll paper to be used.

- The print length accuracy may be adjusted using either roll 1 or 2.

Note: For the first test print, do not change the preset correction value, i.e. use

default value as it is.


Three sheets are outputted continuously. (print length: 1189 mm)

5 Measure the paper length of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the

specification.For the measuring method and reference value, see 7.2.1 No.1.


Go to step 9, finishing the test.

If out of the specification, change the preset correction value and adjust. ⇒Go to step 6.


Example 1: When the plotting length is short. (The actual print length is 1122.8 mm although

the reference value is 1127.1 mm ± 0.5 %.)

1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference

value:1122.8 - 1127.1 = -4.3 mm



9-18

2. Calculate the shift from the reference value in percentage

-4.3 ÷ 1127.1 = -0.00382 (about 0.38 % short)


(Default = 1915 lines/sec)

4. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the print length to reference

value:

1915 × (-0.00382) = -7.31 ⇒ -7 lines/sec


1915 - 7 = 1908 lines/sec

Example 2: When the plotting length is long. (The actual print length is 1131.8 mm although

the reference value is 1127.1 mm - 0.5 %.)


1131.8 - 1127.1 = 4.7 mm

2. Calculate the shift from the standard in percentage:

4.7 ÷ 1127.1 = -0.00417 (about 0.42 % long)


(Default = 1915 lines/sec)

4. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the to the print length to

reference value:

1915 × 0.00417 = 7.99 ⇒ 8 lines/sec


1915 + 8 = 1923 lines/sec

7 Output test print of subcode "03." Three sheets are output continuously.

8 Measure the plotting length of the third sheet and check whether it meets the requirement.

If the value is acceptable, save it in NVRAM. If it is still not acceptable, reexecute the

above procedures from Step 6.

(2) If the plotting length is adjusted when the value to be adjusted is known in advance

This adjustment will be effective, for instance, when the user requests the plotting length to be

reduced or extended by certain millimeters.


2 Enter the subcode (engine control parameter) number of the item to be adjusted.

3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) into lines per second to determine the correction value.

For the calculation method, see step 6 of Paragraph (1) above.


5 Execute the print using maintenance code <11> and subcode "03," and check the plotting

length after adjustment.






9-19

9.4.6 Adjusting the Top Edge Registration





This paragraph outlines adjustment procedure and explains, supplementary operations. For





(1) When the top edge registration is adjusted and measured after the test print:

This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data is set to default.


2 Select subcode "11<01> Front-Regist."

3 Select roll paper and print length test conditions.

Note: For the first test print, do not change preset correction value, i.e. use default

value as it is.


Three sheets are outputted continuously.5 Measure the top edge registration of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the

specifications.





If out of the specification, change preset correction value and adjust (Go to step 9.)


Example 1: When the top edge registration is short. (The actual top edge registration is 18.2

mm although the reference value is 21.7 ± 3.0 mm.)

1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and reference value:

18.2 - 21.7 = -3.5 mm

2. Multiply the difference to the process speed to calculate the number of

seconds: (process speed = 80 mm/s)

-3.5 ÷ 80 = -0.04375 (sec)

⇒ This means the plotting starts 43.75 ms earlier.



9-20

3. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the registration to the reference

value (1 step = 1.0 msec).

43.75 ÷ 1 = 43.75 ⇒ 44 (steps)


(Default = 400 steps*)

* The default is determined by the print length and paper specifications.


400 + 44 = 444 (steps)

Example 2: When the top edge registration is long. (The actual top edge registration is 25.7

mm although the reference value is 21.7 ± 3.0 mm.)


25.7 - 21.7 = 4.0 mm

2. Multiply the difference to the process speed to calculate the number of

seconds: (process speed = 80 mm/s)

4.0 ÷ 80 = -0.05 (sec)

⇒ This means the plotting starts 55 msec later.


value (1 step = 2.0 msec).

50.0 ÷ 1 = 50.0 ⇒ 50 (steps)


(Default = 400 steps*)

* The default is determined by the print length and paper specifications.

5. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the print length to the reference

value.

400 - 50 = 350 (steps)

7 Output the print of subcode "01." Three sheets are output continuously.

8 Measure the lead edge registration of the third sheet outputted check if it satisfies the

specifications. If the value is acceptable, save it in NVRAM. If it is still not acceptable,

reexecute the above procedures from Step 6.

(2) If the top edge registration is adjusted when the condition and value to be adjusted are

known in advance:

This adjustment is effective, for instance, when the user requests the top edge registration of

plain paper A2 to be reduced or extended by certain millimeters.

1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select the maintenance code <12>.


3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) to the number of steps to determine the correction

value. Enter that correction value. For the calculation method, see Step 6 of Paragraph

(1) above.

4 When you want to change the test conditions to adjust the top edge registration, repeat steps

2 and 3 above.




9-21


6 Perform maintenance code <11>, subcode <01> to print, check the top edge registration

after adjustment.

- Check all the subcodes where the top edge registration was adjusted.

- For the adjusted subcodes, match the test conditions and the print conditions.

For the print method, see Section 2.2.11. For measuring method and reference value, see

No. 3 in Section 7.2.1.

9.4.7 Adjusting the Center Registration





This paragraph outlines adjustment procedure and explains supplementary operations. For





(1) When the center registration is adjusted and measured after the test print:

This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data is set to default.

1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select the maintenance code <11>.

2 Select the subcode "11<02> Center-Regist."

3 Select the roll paper to be used.

Note: For the first test print, do not change preset correction value, i.e. use default

value as it is.



5 Measure the top edge registration of the sheet outputted third to check if it satisfies the

specifications.For the measuring method and reference value, see 7.2.1 No.4.




If out of the specification, change preset correction value and adjust. ⇒Go to step 6.



9-22


Example 1: When the center registration is short. (The actual center registration is 25.2 mm

although the reference value is 21.7 ± 3.0 mm.)

1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference value.

25.2 - 21.7 = -3.5 mm

2. Convert the difference to the number of dot pitches (1 pitch = 0.0508 mm).

-3.5 ÷ 0.0508 = -6.9 pitches

⇒This means the 6.9 pitch print position is

shifted rightward.


value (1 step = 1 pitches).

6.9 ÷ 1 = 6.9 ⇒ 7 (steps)


(Default = 50 steps)5. Calculate the correction value and enter the result:

50 + 7 = 57 (steps)

Example 2: When the center registration is long. (The actual side registration is 25.7 mm

although the reference value is 21.7 ± 3.0 mm.)

1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the standard:

25.7 - 21.7 = 4.0 mm

2. Convert the difference to the number of dot pitches (1 pitch = 0.508 mm):

4.0 ÷ 0.508 = 7.9 (pitches)

⇒This means the 7.9 pitch print position is

shifted leftward.


value (1 step = 8 pitches):

7.9 ÷ 1 = 7.9 ⇒ 8 (steps)


(Default = 50 steps)


50 - 8 = 42 (step)



8 Measure the lead edge registration of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the

specifications. If the value is acceptable, save it to NVRAM. If it is still not acceptable,

reexecute the above procedures from Step 6.

(2) If the center registration is adjusted when the condition and value to be adjusted are known

in advance

This method is effective when the user requests you to shift the center registration of the roll 1 to

the left or right by a given amount.






9-23

3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) to the number of steps to determine the correction

value.

For the calculation method, see step 6 of Paragraph (1) above.

4 When you want to change the test conditions to adjust the center registration, repeat steps

2 and 3 above.

5 Save the correction value to NVRAM.

6 Execute the print with maintenance code <11> and subcode "03," and check the center

registration after adjustment.

- Check all codes with which the center registration was adjusted.

- Adjust the print condition to the test condition of the codes used for adjustment.





9-24

9.5 Adjusting the Paper Top Edge Dead Space

The device supports the following maximum plotting range:

The device has a dead space of 3 mm at the top edge of the paper.When the user wants wider plotting range, the dead space can be reduced so that the image will

be printed as near to the edge as possible. To this end, perform the maintenance code <12>,

subcode "663" of engine maintenance mode of "Top Edge Clip Requirement."

Note: If this adjustment is performed, explain the user that the possibility of paper

jam increases and get approval.

The dead space at the top edge of paper is provided as the clip amount to

separate the paper from the heat roller in the fusing process. Accordingly, if

this clip amount is narrowed, the possibility of paper jam increases

(particularly when high density data is plotted at the top edge of paper).

The preset value for the top edge clip amount adjustment does not become

effective unless the device is rebooted, thus requiring care.


2 Enter the subcode "663."

3 Convert the desired dead space (mm) into the number of lines.

Example: To set the dead space to 1mm, conduct the following operation. (default: 71 lines

= 3.0 mm)

: Determine what number of lines is equivalent to 1 mm (1 line = 0.04233 mm)

and enter the result.

1 ÷ 0.04233 = 23.62 ⇒ 24 (lines)

4 Save the value in NVRAM.

5 Turn off the device once and turn it on again to reboot the system.

6 Allow the computer to send the data whose top margin is minimum to the device and check

whether the plotting is printed correctly.



9-26

5 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "712": Line adjustment parameter used for head B

(fixed to 0)

6 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "713": Lin adjustment parameter used between heads

C and B (setting range: 87 to 93)

This parameter adjusts the shift in the order of line. The amount of 42.3 µm is shifted

against the adjustment value "1." To find the first print shift, temporarily set both

maintenance code <12>, subcord "711" and maintenance code <12>, subcord "713" to 98.

Since maintenance code <12>, subcord "712" is a reference, or head B, the value must be

fixed to 0.

(3) Basic operation

Shown below are operations observed on the device when above parameters settings are

changed.

(a) Maintenance code <12>, subcord "708" and maintenance code <12>, subcord "709"

1 When decreasing set values:

Images A and C move in the paper feed direction with image B used as reference.

2 When increasing set values:

Images A and C move in the direction reverse to the paper feed direction with image B used as

reference.

CB

A

Shifted

Paper feed direction

* Image B does not move since it is reference.

C

B

A

Shifted


Shifted





9-27

(b) Maintenance code <12>, subcord "711" and maintenance code <12>, subcord "713"

1 When decreasing set values:

Images A and C move in the direction reverse to the paper feed direction with image B used as

reference.

2 When increasing set values:

Images A and C move in the paper feed direction with image B used as reference.

C

B

A

Shifted


Shifted


CB

A

Shifted


Shifted




9-28

(4) Print pattern

Use pattern 7. Print out maintenance code <10>, subcode <07>.

(5) Adjustment method

(a) Check the adjustment positions.

Provide the following parameter settings and printed.

Maintenance code <12>, subcode "708": 0






With the above settings, the pattern is output with images shifted as shown below. Identify the

place of shift from this sample.

CB

A





9-29

(b) Adjustment

Execute the test printing by setting the following parameters respectively. These values are set,

considering the distance 3.8 mm between A and B, and B and C of the LED head.

Maintenance code <12> subcode "708": 16






In the following settings, adjust according to how the printed image is shifted.

1 If A and C are shifted in the paper feed direction on the basis of B

Increase the setting values of both maintenance code <12> subcode "708" and maintenancecode <12> subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against the adjustment value

"1.")

If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, decrease the set values of both

maintenance code <12> subcode "711" and maintenance code <12> subcode "713."

If they are initially 90, decrease them to 89.

After the adjustment in the unit of line, fine adjustment is necessary. Thus, check the shift

direction and set the appropriate values to maintenance code <12> subcode "708" and

maintenance code <12> subcode "709."

C B A




9-30

2 If A and C are shifted in the paper feed direction on the basis of B

Decrease the setting values of both maintenance code <12> subcode "708" and maintenance

code <12> subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against the adjustment value "1.")

If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, increase the setting values of

both maintenance code <12> subcode "711" and maintenance code <12> subcode "713."

If they are initially 90, decrease them to 91.




C

B

A





9-31

3 If A is shifted in the paper feed direction, C is shifted in the paper feed direction and

reverce direction on the basis of B

Increase the setting values of maintenance code <12> subcode "708." Decrease the setting

value of maintenance code <12> subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against

the adjustment value "1.")

If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, decrease the setting value of

maintenance code <12> subcode "711" and increase the set value of maintenance code <12>

subcode "713."




C

BA




9-32

4 If A is shifted in the paper feed direction and reverce direction, C is shifted in the paper

feed direction on the basis of B

Decrease the setting values of maintenance code <12> subcode "708." Increase the set value

of maintenance code <12> subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against the

adjustment value "1.")

If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, increase the setting value of

maintenance code <12> subcode "711" and decrease the set value of maintenance code <12>

subcode "713."




(6) Judgment criteria

When lines are united in the scan direction on the test pattern 7, head joints are correctly adjusted.

Note that some lines may exceptionally be dislocated (terminated) due to jitter. If other lines are

united, the image is acceptable.

(7) Data storage

When the image is acceptable, save the data in the NVRAM. See Section "2.3.13 Maintenance

Code 13 "NVRAM" (NVRAM)."

C

B

A




Chapter 10 Operational Description

10-1


This chapter gives fundamental information to understand mechanical operations of this device,

as well as the information on the controller that performs data communications with the

computers.

10.1 through 10.8 describe the information concerning the engine:

10.1 Features

10.2 Engine Specifications

10.3 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part

10.4 Fundamental Operation (Overall Operation)

10.5 Electrophotographic Process Operation

10.6 Drive and Feed System Operation

10.7 Control System

10.8 Controller



10-2

10.1 Features

This device is an intelligent plotter that uses a magnetic one-component developing system plus

600 dpi wide LED head as a developer so that it can realize excellent printing quality andquietness suitable for LAN environment.

Main features are as follows:

1 Easy operation-first user interface design

- All operations (paper feed, drawing output) are performed at the front.

- 2-drawer type roll paper feed

2 Lightweight, compact-size, and high cost-performance engine

3 Stabilized printing by use of a one-component developing system




10-3

10.2 Engine Specifications

1 Type: Floor type

2 Recording method : Dry electrophotographic methodPhotosensitive : OPC drum (φ 60)

Charging : Scorotron (negative charge applied, grid control)

Exposure : LED (36 inches, 600 dpi)

Development : One-component development

Transfer : Corona transfer

Separation : AC corona

Cleaning : Blade cleaning

Fusing : Heat roll fusing (halogen lamp)

Toner : 9µ magnetic one component (cartridge 500 g)

3 Recording density : 600 × 600 dpi4 Process speed : 800 mm/sec

5 Process cartridge capability: about 5 km

6 Paper: Media : Normal paper (high quality paper)/Recycled paper/

Tracing paper/Mat film

Paper feed : 2-roll auto paper feed with cutter/A0, front paper feed

Paper ejection : Faceup, front ejection, tray/bucket (OP)

Effective recording width : 926.48 mm (A0), guaranteed area inside 5 mm from top

and trail edges and 3 mm from both side edges

Long size printing : 2.5 m (in use of A0 paper roll), or 10 m for L type

7 Print quality : Density : 1.0 or more

Density uniformity : 0.3 or less

Jam rate : 1/3000 or less (normal paper)

8 MTBF : 2000 h (not including consumable parts)

9 Weight : 190 kg or less (main unit + photosensitive drum)

0 Power consumption : 1350 W

Warming up time : within 4 minutes (at 23°C)

A Operating environment : Temperature ; 15 - 35°C

Humidity : 20 - 80%RH

B Noise : During operation : 61 dB or less

During standby : 53 dB or less

C Device life : S model is 80 km and L model is 200 km



10-4

10.3 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part

A sectional view of the internal mechanism of the device is shown in Figure 10-1 to show the

paper flow and name of each part.

2

1

G4

3

5 6

7

8

9

A B CD

E

F

1 Roll 1

2 Roll 2

3 Slitter cutter

4 Register roller

5 Primary charger

6 LED head

7 Developer

8 Developing sleeve

9 Transfer/separator

0 FingerA Cleaner

B Charge eliminator

C Photosensitive drum

D Suction feeder

E Fixation

F Heat roller

G Backup roller

H Roller (manual feed 1)

I Roller (manual feed 2)

H

I

Figure 10-1 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part

Process cartridge

6 LED head

B Charge eliminator is

not included.

0




10-5

10.4 Basic Operation (Overall Operation)

10.4.1 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration

This device consists of the four main blocks: paper feed and feed system; electrophoto process;

controller, and interface systems.

Figure 10-2 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration

Controller

Control panelEnginecontrolcircuit(board)

Chargeelimination

Cleaner

Externalequipment

Interface circuit

Raster controller

circuit

Datacontroller Fixation

Paperejector

Feedsystem

Roll paper

Paper cutter

Roll paperfeed mechanism

Registration

Paper feed andfeed system

Transferseparation

Drum Development

Primarycharge

Exposure(LED)

Electrophoto process system



10-6

10.4.2 Overview of Device Configuration

Figure 10-3 Overview of Device Configuration Drawing

OPERATION PANEL

BL02,BL06 INT1

TH01TH02

FUSER

FL01FL02

PS07

ELCC

DRUM

LEDH

TH03

CLEANER

MS04GM01

DEVELOPER

TS01

DBDDBA

CL04REGISTROLLER

PS05

TCDCPS06

BL01PM01 PMFG

INT3

CUTTER

CUTM

RE01/02

CL06

PS30PS31PS32PS04

PF ROLLER 1

ROLL-1

ROLL-2

PF ROLLER 2

AC IN

BL06

BM01

MS08

TH04

TS02

MS05

BL03 R/C/L

TM01

MS07

PS15

MRC2 HDD MEC LVPS HV-PS

PS11PS21

FM01

PS12PS22

FM02

HM01

MS06-1

MS06-2

BL05-1 to 3




10-7

Table 10-1 Symbol Table

Name SYMBOL

Develpment DP

Transfer TC

Separation DCCharge CC

Charge elimination EL

Process motor PM01

Developer pulse motor GM01

Paper feed pulse motor TM01

Heat roller pulse motor HM01

Paper feed pulse motor 1 FM01

Paper feed pulse motor 2 FM02

Cutter motor CUTM

Registration roller clutch CL04

Manual feed roller clutch CL06Suction fan BL01

Fixation upper center blower BL02

Charger blower BL03 R/C/L

Fixation upper (both side fan) BL06

Fixation halogen lamp 1 FL01

Fixation halogen lamp 2 FL02

Paper detection sensor (for judgment of A0 width) PS30



Paper detection sensor (lower cutter) PS04Paper detection sensor (register) PS05

Paper detection sensor (suction) PS06

Paper detection sensor (fuser) PS07

Roll 1 (upper tray) flange detection sensor PS11

Roll 2 (middle tray) flange detection sensor PS12

Manual feed paper detection sensor PS15

Roll 1 drawer open/close sensor PS21

Roll 2 drawer open/close sensor PS22

Toner door open/close switch MS04

Waste toner bottle detection switch MS05

Fixation device door open/close switch MS06-1, MS06-2

Upper left door open/close switch MS08

Upper door open/close interlock switch INT1

Cutter door open/close interlock switch INT3

Cutter blade (right end) detection micro switch RE01

Cutter blade (left end) detection micro switch RE02

Toner sensor TS01

Waste toner sensor TS02

Fixation temperature measurement thermistor (center) TH01

Fixation overheat detection thermistor TH02

LED head temperature measurement thermistor TH03

Fixation temperature measurement thermistor (edge) TH04



10-8

10.4.3 Configuration Block Diagram

The mechanical controller receives signals sent from external devices, and drives the LED head

and controls actuators to print operation. The controller also creates test patterns by means of the

internal board to print those sheets without signal input from external devices.

Figure 10-4 Configuration Block Diagram

RIPcontroller

Enginecontroller

Parallel interfaceUSB

P C B - A S S Y - M R C 2

P C B - A S S Y - M E C

Ethernet interface

Switches andsensors

Blowers

Clutch

Charge eliminator

Sensors

Cutter motor

Motor driver

Charger cleaningmotor

Pulse motors(GM01)

Pulse motors(TM01, FM01,

FM02)

LED head

DC servo motor(PM01)

High voltagepower unit

Fusing heater

Subpower unit

HDD

H e a t e r

c o n t r o l

+ 5 V

+ 2 4 V

Low voltage power unit

Control panel

AC100V

Main power switch

+ 2 4 V

+ 5 V

+ 2 4 V

A C 1 0 0 V

Primary charger

Developer

Transfer

Separator

+24V

+5V

+5V+12V



10-10

(5) Post-rotation

1 Section

- After transfer OFF until the main motor stops.

2 Purpose

- Removes residual toner and potential on the drum, and ejects the paper.

3 Operation

- After an image was transferred on the paper, the drum rotates by about one turn to stabilize

the drum surface.




10-11

10.5 Electrophotographic Process Operation

10.5.1 Primary Charging

As the first step for forming an electrostatic image, the primary charging process is provided to

charge the photosensitive drum surface uniformly.

This device uses the proven corona charging system (scorotron system excellent in negative

charging performance).

(1) Function of primary charger

1 Photosensitive drum surface potential applying function (corona discharge function +

discharge stabilizing function)

: Arranges the charges discharged from the charging wire by the grid electrode and applies

them to the photosensitive drum surface.

(2) General description of scorotron charging system

1 Principle

Corona discharge (negative corona)

: As the electrodes, a pointed conductor such as a needle and wire is used, and as the opposed

electrode, a flat plate is used, and then if the voltage applied between them is gradually

increased, a pointed part slightly sparks and the current of several micron ampere flows.

This phenomenon is called the corona discharge.

Negative corona

: If negative voltage is applied to the corona electrode wire (negative pole) and the voltage is

increased, the electric filed on negative pole surface increases, and electrons are emitted by

the field emission, which are the initial electrons. These electrons are accelerated in high

electric field and form the primary electron avalanche. Further, positive ions in the

avalanche flow into the negative pole and the secondary electrons are emitted, thus

generating the secondary avalanche. The avalanche continues in the same manner.

The electrons at the leading edge of these avalanches attach to the gas in the air and become

negative ions, and then they attach to the drum surface to charge.

Principle of scorotron charger

: The scorotron charger provides amplification effect by the principle of triode. This utilizes

the fact that the electrons move in the electric field, and it amplifies the entire charged

electric field. A salient electric field generated from the charged electric field flows into this

grid, but a large salient electric field does not propagate down to the drum from the grid.

Normally, the power supply is not connected to the grid electrode but the varistor (Zener

diode) is connected. The varistor is a semiconductor of which resistance value varies

according to the voltage, and it discharges when the voltage is high and does not discharge

when low.

2 Configuration

: A wire electrode as a conductor, and a shield electrode that covers the wire electrode are

arranged, and also a grid electrode is installed at the opening.



10-12

10.5.2 Photosensitive Drum

As an electrophotographic photosensitive material, this device uses the OPC (organic

photosensitive) material.

(1) Function of photosensitive drum

1 Charge retaining function

2 Electrostatic image holding function

3 Toner transfer function

(2) General description of OPC photosensitive drum

1 Principle

Carrier generation (optical exciter)

: In an organic molecular crystal, exciters are generated by the light exposure. These excitersdiffuse up to the crystal surface and lattice defects, and they interact with electrostatic

potential that exists there and push out electrons and positive holes.

As for the exciters, the exciting state from specific molecules in organic molecular crystal

run over the entire crystal as exciting waves to excite the entire crystal with the same phase.

At this time, the quantized exciting waves are called the exciters.

Ion pairs separated into electrons and positive holes are evaded from one-molecular

recombination and thermally dissociated, generating carriers of electrons and positive

holes. At this time, if no charges exist on the photosensitive surface, the Coulomb’s force

that separates the carriers does not work, allowing them to recombine each other.

Carrier transport: In the non-crystal carrier transport layer, carriers move by hopping between molecules of

the carrier transport material.

The carriers are trapped if adjacent molecules have structural defects that take specific

orientation at close range.

2 Configuration

: Almost OPC photosensitive drums practically used at present are the layered type

consisting of the separated carrier generation and carrier transport which are fundamental

processes of photosensitivity.

3 Surface potential of photosensitive drum

- Charge : -420 to -390 V → -400 to -370 V (dark decay)- Exposure : -20 to -60 V

- Development : -230 to -300 V (developing toner)

- Transfer : -40 to -80 V

- AC separation :0 ± AC → 0 V ± Unstable positive and negative surface potential and

unstable charged toner remain.




10-13

10.5.3 Exposure

This device uses LED head for digital exposure process.

(1) Functions of LED head

1 Exposure function

: Irradiates light to the photosensitive drum to form a latent image.

2 Optical path length automatic correcting function

: Corrects the focal depth automatically (butt roller, etc.) if sufficient focal depth cannot be

ensured.

3 Head/machine internal temperature measuring function

: Thermistors are installed inside the head unit to measure the machine internal temperature

and the head temperature.

4 Line width adjusting function

: The line width can be changed by adjusting the light emitting time of LED.

(2) General description of LED head

LED array

1 Principle (light emitting principle)

: The Hall current applied to the LED array is blocked by the hetero barrier in the "pn"

junction (hetero junction), and the injection current flows toward there (recombination of

carriers), causing the light (hv) to be emitted.

SELFOC lens

1 Principle and manufacturing method: The glass element wire is formed by the materials having the composition containing

graded index forming components such as Cs, Li, and Tl, and it is soaked in the fused salt

that contains calcium nitrate or kalium nitrate to form the refractive index by exchanging

the ions in glass that takes part in refractive index and the ions in the fused salt.

2 Configuration

: Many bar-shaped lenses called the SELFOC (optical converging glass fiber) lens are

arranged (SLA is the trademark of Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd.).

3 Features

: Individual lenses have excellent resolving power and focus a uniform normal standing real

image in real size. However, in total their performance disperses and thus the performanceshould be checked strictly.

As the 1:1 image is formed, the focus must be adjusted finely.

LED head unit

1 Principle

: This optical unit converges the light emitted from the LED array onto the photosensitive

surface by means of the SLA.

2 Configuration

: LED chip, IC, and board are subjected to the die bonding and wire bonding, and adjusted

and inspected, and then assembled with a heat sink, lens, etc.



10-14

10.5.4 Development

The development is a process in which the toner is put on an electrostatic image on the

photosensitive drum surface to make the image visible. When the toner charged in advance

touches the photosensitive drum, whether the toner attaches to the drum depends on the charging

status of the photosensitive surface.To assist the toner attachment and to prevent the toner from attaching to the portions other than

the image, this device adds DC and AC biases.

(1) Functions of developer

1 Toner transfer (development)/bias adding function

: Transfers the toner to an electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum to make the image

visible. A thin film is formed for easy toner transfer.

2 Toner collecting function

: Adds AC bias to collect the toner not used for the development.

3 Toner supply function

: Supplies the toner from the toner cartridge.

Supplies the toner to the sleeve by means of the agitator.

4 Low toner detecting function

: Detects the toner empty state by the toner sensor (piezoelectric sensor).

5 Density adjusting function

: Adjusts the development density by varying the developing bias.

6 Toner agitating function

: Agitates the toner by rotating the agitator to prevent the soft block.

7 Development gap retaining function

: Retains the development gap by pushing the butt roller against the photosensitive drum.

(2) General description of magnetic one-component developing system

1 Principle

: The toner made of magnetic powders of 0.1 to 0.5 µm in size that disperse in the resin

binder added with carbon black is transported by the developing sleeve around the

magnetic roll.

In general, the toner layer of 40 to 50 µm in thickness is formed on the sleeve surface, and

when it is transported up to the photosensitive surface, the charge (AC+DC) is applied to

the toner, and when electrostatic attraction between the latent image and the toner becomeslarger than the magnetic binding force, the toner attaches to the latent image to develop.

2 Configuration

: The sleeve made of non-magnetic materials such as stainless steel and aluminum material

rotates in the forward direction relative to the photosensitive drum. Its rotating speed is one

to three times the surface speed of the photosensitive drum.

The magnetic roll is fixed in the sleeve so that it does not rotate, and six magnetic poles are

arranged where the main pole having the strongest magnetic force is arranged in opposition

to the photosensitive drum. This main pole is located at the rotational upstream side (1 - 5°)

from a line connecting the center of sleeve and the center of photosensitive drum.

A rubber blade is forcibly pushed against the sleeve in the counter direction of the sleeve

rotation, and the toner is charged while its layer is thinned by being scraped by this rubber

blade. Also, AC+DC bias voltages are supplied to the sleeve to assist the toner movement

during the development.



10-16

10.5.6 Separation

To separate the paper after transfer, a system that uses both general AC discharge separation and

finger separation is employed.

(1) Function of separator

1 Paper discharging function

: Eliminate charges from the paper and photosensitive drum.

(2) General description of AC discharge separation system

To separate the paper appropriately, the AC discharge separation system discharges the paper

after transfer using an AC charger and a discharge needle.

If the OPC photosensitive drum is used, the recording paper is positively charged by the transfer

charger and attracted to the photosensitive drum surface by electrostatic force. Accordingly, theseparating charger discharges AC corona to remove electrostatic attractive force between the

recording paper and the drum so as to separate the recording paper.

In general, thin paper having small stiffness may result in a separation failure, and therefore the

AC discharge voltage value and a range of permissible value must be determined from the image

quality and separation performance.

The separation guide prevents the print paper from entering the charger. Also, the separation

guide surface is coated with conductive paint so that the potential on the paper feed surface and

the recording paper becomes the same in order to prevent the toner from splashing.

10.5.7 Cleaning

If the toner is not transferred completely and remains or paper powder is present on the

photosensitive drum, it will obstruct the next process or enter the developer, causing a problem.

The cleaning process removes these residuals on the photosensitive surface.

This device uses a blade cleaning system that scrapes off the residuals mechanically.

(1) Functions of cleaning

1 Photosensitive drum surface residual toner removing function

: Using the blade, removes the toner and paper powder remaining on the photosensitive drum.

2 Photosensitive drum surface polishing function

: Pushes the blade against the drum to polish the photosensitive drum surface, so that the

deterioration of drum surface such as a filming can be prevented.

3 Waste toner transport function

: Transports waste toner by the auger screw.

4 Splash preventive function

: Prevents the toner from splashing by the toner receiver (film).

(2) General description of blade cleaning (blade cleaning method)

The abrasion resistant blade such as polyurethane scrapes off the residual toner on the drum

surface.




10-17

10.5.8 Charge Elimination

Residual potential on the photosensitive drum after transfer shows uneven value by the action

receiving from each process. Under this condition, if the next process is performed, an after-

image of the previous print may appear, and therefore residual potential on the photosensitive

drum must be uniform by the charge elimination before the primary charging.

This device uses the LED discharging system by means of the light.

(1) Function of charge elimination

1 Residual potential removing function

: Removes residual potential on the photosensitive drum surface by irradiating the light with

the LEDs.

(2) General description of LED charge elimination

In general, red LEDs are used. To adjust the LED light emitting quantity to the drum sensitivity,

the number of LEDs and LED driving voltage must be controlled by PWM.

Emitting the discharging light at the drum while performing the charging (primary charging),

check whether the drum charged voltage is stable to determine the LED light quantity.

10.5.9 Fusing

The fusing fixes the toner on the paper.

This device uses already proven thermal fusing (heat roll) from the viewpoint of image quality

and fixation.

(1) Functions of fuser

1 Heating function

: Heats the aluminum heat roller by using a halogen lamp.

2 Temperature detection and control function

: Temperature detection range 160°C - 190°C

(Type: Temperature detection by thermistor,

heater ON/OFF)

Overheat detection 200°C (Type: Thermistor)

Overheat prevention Overheat prevention by thermal fuse

3 Power saving function

4 Paper feed function

5 Paper compression/nip release function

: Releases the nip of fusing rollers by interlocking with the fuser unit opening/closing.

6 Cooling air flow

: Exhausts the air on the sides of the device using the blowers.

7 Offset prevention

: Prevents the toner offset by using a Teflon roller.

8 High temperature protective function



10-18

(2) General description of heat roll fusing system

1 Principle

: The toner fixation is attained through five processes of 1) toner particles are semi-fused by

the heat, 2) combined, 3) deformed (spread) to wet the paper, 4) the fused toner penetrates

(anchors) between the paper fibers, and 5) solidifies by being cooled to adhere to the paper.

The main component of toner, polymer resin, changes its state from glass to rubber and then

viscous fluid through glass transition state according to the temperature change.

2 Configuration

: The upper heat roll heats the aluminum metallic core from the inside using a halogen lamp

heater. Also, the metallic core surface is coated with the resin such as Teflon to improve the

parting performance in relation to the toner. The lower backup (pressure) roll made from a

metallic core coated with thermosetting silicone rubber excellent in oil resistance, weather

resistance, and compression restorable performance is pushed against the upper heat roll to

ensure the nip width.




10-19

10.6 Operation of Drive and Feed Systems

10.6.1 Drive System

The drive system of this device consists of a paper feed drive motor, cutter upper roller drive

motor, process drive motor, and fuser drive motor. The developer and cutter drive motors are also

installed and these motors can be operated individually.

(1) Process drive motor

This motor drives the register roller, drum, cleaner auger, and manual feed roller. The register

roller and the manual feed roller are equipped with the drive force transmission clutch, so that the

paper feed drive can be turned on or off according to the operational requirements.

(2) Cutter upper roller drive motor

This motor drives the cutter upper roller.

(3) Paper feed motor

This motor feeds or rewinds the rolled paper.

(4) Developer drive

The developer is driven by the developer motor (GM01) installed on the developer. As a drive

motor, the stepping motor is used to drive the agitator and the sleeve through the gear

transmission.

(5) Fixation drive motor

The fuser is driven by the fuser motor installed on the fuser. As a drive motor, the stepping motor

is used to drive the heat roller and the backup roller through the gear transmission.

10.6.2 Paper feed system

(1) Paper feed unit

1 Structure of paper feed unit

: The paper feed unit is composed of the two drawers arranged vertically where paper rolls

can be fed respectively.



10-20

2 Paper feed/print operation

First print

: The first sheet (immediately after powering on, or first sheet of intermittent print) needs the

pre-rotation of the photosensitive drum, and therefore the print does not start for about 7.4

seconds (pre-rotation time) after the print request is made from the controller until the

exposure starts.

Intermittent print (paper switching print)

: The paper switching operation is inserted if the paper size is different between the first data

and the next data.

Continuous print (copy)

: In a continuous print (copy), the leading edge of the next paper is gripped by the register

roller before the paper of the first data printing is ejected to shorten the printing interval.

Continuous print (if there is a spool and the controller processing is in time)

: Despite different data, if the paper size is the same and the controller processing is in time,

the print is possible at the similar print interval to that of copy print.

(2) Cutter

The paper is cut by a slitter type cutter. At the time of cutting, the buffer is given to the paper in

advance to prevent the image quality from being reduced due to a change of paper movement.

The paper cutting time is about one second and the paper buffer is given for about one second (80

mm).

(3) Suction unit

The suction unit feeds the paper by means of belts while sucking the paper by fans in order not to

disturb unfixed toner image transferred to the paper.

This device uses a system that transports the paper while sucking the entire surface of the paper

by sirocco fans. The exhaust air is led to the sides of the device.

The drive force of suction belts is supplied from the process motor via the gears.

(4) Paper unfeed unit

The paper unfeed unit is part of the fuse unit and it is driven by the same drive system as that of

the fuse roller.

The paper unfeed roller rotates at high speed relative to the fuse roller so that it applies tension tothe paper fed from the fuser. This tension is required to prevent a wrinkle of the paper.

At the paper ejection outlet, a bucket or stacker can be installed as an option.

(5) Register roller

The register roller made of a metallic shaft having a concave-convex surface provides the largest

paper transport force among all paper feed rollers to ensure the paper feed accuracy.




10-21

10.7 Control System

10.7.1 Process Control

(1) Drum surface potential control

As the scorotron charge system is used as a charge system, fundamentally the drum surface

potential is not controlled.

(2) LED head write control

The LED head write timing is controlled on the basis of pulse signals from the engine control

board. By adjusting finely this base pulse signals, the print timing is varied and the print accuracy

can be adjusted.

(3) Development density control

The development density is determined from correlation of a difference between the dark

potential and the light potential of the photosensitive drum and a development bias (DC). Here, it

is hard to control a difference between the dark potential and the light potential, but the

development density control of this device controls the line width change by controlling the LED

head light emitting time (STB width) and controls the development bias.

(4) Fuse roller temperature control

The fuse roller temperature is controlled within the set temperature range by controlling the on/

off of the fuser lamp based on the temperature value detected by the thermistor.

The fuser lamp turns on when the temperature dropped below the preset value on the low

temperature side, or it turns off when the temperature reached the preset value on the high

temperature side.

10.7.2 Paper Feed Control

As for the paper feed control, the feed amount of the main motor is controlled by controlling the

paper cut timing.

To control the paper feed speed, the motor rotation speed is controlled as mentioned in the motor

section.



10-22

10.8 Controller

10.8.1 Description of Controller Specifications

1 Data format

: HP-GL, HP-GL/2, HP RTL, TIFF, CALS

2 Setup function

: SETUP, DEVICE, PAPER, FUNCTION, PROTOCOL, RESET, SYSTEM

3 Memory configuration (see the table below)

* L model allows long printing up to 10 m.

4 Input interface

: Ethernet interface (ftp/xpt/lpr)

- 100Base-TX and 10Base-TX are supported.

(Half/full duplex)

: USB interface (port B)

- USB2.0 is supported (HI SPEED / FULL SPEED)

: Parallel interface (conforming to IEEE1284 (compatibility mode))

- IEEE1284 (conforming to compatibility mode)- Maximum cable length: 10 m

Systemconfiguration

Memoryconfiguration

Systemoperation

Spool Page memory

Standard 256MB 84MB 12M 160M Equivalent to 2.5 m

Equipped with HDD 256MB 96MB 2G 160M Equivalent to 2.5 m*



10-24

Computer

Communication driver

Spool driver

Spool memory

Page (raster) memory

Engine driver

Engine

Communication driver:

- Sends the received data to the spool driver.

- Processes the protocol control command sent from the computer.

PDL:

- A process controlled under the OS. After the main data judgment block

judges the received data, the PDL connected to the resulted data format

works.

- Reads the received data from the spool memory, analyzes the read

data, and pastes the raster data to the page memory.

- Requests printout to the engine driver.

- Plots drawings only in response to the data print command.

Spool memory:

- Stores the received data.

Spool driver:

- Opens the memory when receiving the data from the communication

driver.

Page (raster) memory:

- Saves the date processed with the PDL.

Engine driver:

- Receives the print request from the PDL and commands the engine to

start printing.

10.8.3 Data Processing Flowchart

The flowchart in Figure 10-6 shows how the data sent from the computer is processed in the

device.

Figure 10-6 Data Processing Flowchart



A-1

Appendix A MEC Board Setup and LED Indication


Appendix A describes how to set the DIP switches and how to see the LED indication on the

MEC board.

A.1 Setting the DIP Switches

A.1.1 Setting 8-bit DIP Switch on MEC Board (SW4)

The setting of the DIP switch (DIP SW) on the MEC board is listed below.

If the DIP switch setting is changed, reboot the power.

DIPSW-5 is normally set to OFF, and set to ON only when the console is used.

(All bits must be set to normal position when the machine is delivered)

Bit Meaning of ON position Meaning of OFF position Normal

position

DIPSW-1 – – OFF

DIPSW-2 – – OFF

DIPSW-3 – – OFF

DIPSW-4 – – OFF

DIPSW-5 Console is used Console is not used OFF

DIPSW-6 – – OFF

DIPSW-7 – – OFF

DIPSW-8 Long size (10 m) LP-1010L Standard (2.5 m) LP-1010 –

SW2 (both bits must be ON)

LEDSW4

SW3ON ON

1 8 1 2 1 8



A-3


A.2 LED Indication

The following shows how to see the LED indication on the MEC board.

The LED ON/Flashing/OFF are expressed as follows:

: ON

: Flashing

: OFF

: Indeterminate

_ : Don't care

A.2.1 LED indication on MEC board

(1) LED indication immediately after powering on

The LED immediately after powering on indicates that the power on check is in progress or that

an error was detected during check.

At the start of check, the corresponding LED turns on, and at successful termination of check, the

corresponding LED of the next check item turns on.

If an error is detected, the corresponding LED of the check item continues flashing.

Step Check item Corresponding LED

LED indication innormal state

LED indication aterror detection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Engine firmware operation

start LED8 –

2 Program checksum in flash

memory (or IC card) LED7

3 CPU built-in RAM read/write

check LED6 and LED7

4 Board matching check LED5 and LED8

5 SRAM read/write check LED6

6 NVRAM presence check LED5

7 Program copy to SRAM LED5 and LED7

(Go to (2), (3), or (4))



A-4

LEDLED indication

Description of function1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

LED1 and LED2 _________

Indicate the low-order two bits of ongoing task ID.

LEDs are flashing when the task is switched

normally.

LED3 ____ _________ (Reserved)

Used for debugging. Applications not specified.

LED4 and LED7 Indicate the engine status.

____ __

(LED4/5/6/7 all OFF)

Power saving

____ __

(LED7 ON, LED4/5/6 OFF)

Warming up

____ __


Standby status

____ __

(LED6/7 ON, LED4/5 OFF)

Printing

____ __


Recoverable error occurring

____ __

(LED4/5 ON, LED6/7 OFF)

Unrecoverable error occurring

____ __


Initialized state (clock input mode)

NVRAM is not initialized.

LED8 Indicates whether the print request is present or not.

_____________ Turns on when the print request is accepted, and turns

off when the requested print finished.

_____________ Turns off when no print request is present.

(2) LED indication in usual operation

Upon successful termination of the check at powering on, the indication of respective LED is as

follows:

LED1 and LED2 : Ongoing task ID

LED3 : (Indeterminate because of use for firmware debugging)

LED4 - LED7 : Engine status

LED8 : Presence of print request



A-5


(3) LED indication in case of other errors

Flashing of LED4 to LED8 indicates the following errors.

(4) LED indication when power is turned off

When the main power switch is turned off, the circuit interrupts the firmware.

After that, for more than 10 msec, the 5 V power supply is retained for CPU operation and the

firmware can operate.

The firmware accepts this interruption, saves the system parameters such as total print distance in

the NVRAM within 10 msec, and also turns on the LED4/5/6/7/8.

Afterwards, the 5 V power supply shuts down and all LEDs turn off.

If LED4 through LED8 do not turn on when the main power switch is turned off, the interruption

from the circuit failed, or saving of system parameters in NVRAM has not finished yet.

In this case, "2033: Interruption does not occur at powering off" error will occur when the power

is turned on next time.

LED indicationDescription of firmware processing

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

______ Interruption occurs when the power is turned off.

The saving of information such as total print distance in NVRAM finished.

LED indication

Description of error1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

_____ Unexpected interruption occurred.

_____ NMI interruption occurred.

_____ Interruption nest under error

_____ Interruption nest over error



A-6

A.3 Reset Switch (SW1) on MEC Board

Pressing the reset switch SW1 causes the circuits of MEC board to be reset, and also the firmware

to be reset (restart).

However, unlike powering off and on operation, the system parameters such as total print

distance are not saved and therefore do not use this switch usually.

Using the switch causes "2033: Interruption does not occur at powering off" error.

Instead, turn off and then on the power switch.



B-1

Appendix B Setup RFU Board

Appendix B RFU Board Setup

A DIP switch is mounted on the RFU board. This appendix describes how to set up this switch.

B.1 Setup of DIP Switch

B.1.1 DIP Switch on the RFU Board

Set DIP switch SW1 according to the roll paper configuration of the roll paper feed unit.

Bit Meaning of ON (up) posit ion Meaning of OFF (down) posit ion

1 Roll 1 is loaded. Roll 1 is not loaded.



4 Paper feed mechanism specificallyused for roll flanges (S)

Paper feed mechanism specificallyused for roll flanges (L).

SW1

41



C-1

Appendix C Setup MRC2 Board

Appendix C MRC2 Board Setup

The following describes the setting of DIP switches on the MRC2 board.

C.1 Setup of DIP Switches

C.1.1 DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW7)

For setting DIP switch SW7, the revisions of the MRC2 board have been set.

C.1.2 DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW2)

For setting DIP switch SW2, all bits are set to OFF position.

Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4Rev.A OFF OFF OFF OFF

Rev.B ON OFF OFF OFF

Rev.C OFF ON OFF OFF

Rev.D ON ON OFF OFF

SW3

SW1

SW7

SW2



C-2

C.1.3 DIP Switch (SW3) on MRC2 Board

See "Table 1-2 Other version up list" in "1.5.3 Other Version Up."

C.1.4 DIP Switch (SW1) on MRC2 Board

For setting DIP switch SW1, the CPU clock mounted on the MRC2 board has been set.

The setting of this switch is fixed, therefore do not change it.

ON

Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1

OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF



D-1

Appendix D Menu Structure


This appendix describes the menu structure of the device. It also includes specific menus for

maintenance people that they can select on the control panel.



D-2

Menu Structure

This section describes how to read the menu structure using "SYSTEM - # PARA" menu on

page D-14 as an example.

Hint: For the information on how to select individual menus, as well as user-

accessible menu functions, refer to the User's Guide.

Note: The DSCAN format listed in the menu structure are for only customers in

Japan.

Menu hierarchy

Shipping default

: The parameter indicated

beneath the menu shows a

shipping default.

Menu specialized for maintenance people

: The item connected with broken lines (---)

shows the menu from which only the

maintenance people can enter the

maintenance person mode to conduct

various operations.

# Para # OPERATION MODE> NORMAL

# ACK ON TIME (30 ns)> 80

# ACK PULSE (30 ns)

> 80

# BUSY OFF TIMING> ACK RISING EDGE

# SELECT SIGNAL> ON

# AF SIGNAL REPORT> INPUT

# TIME OUT> 30 sec



D-3


*DATA FIRST

*PANEL FIRST

*A

*9"

*8.5"*30 42

*MAP

*DIN

*CHINA

*CONT MODE

*OPTIMAL MODE

*ROLL 1 MODE

*ROLL 2 MODE (3)

*ROLL 3 MODE (3)

*MANUAL FEED

*FIXED SIZE (4)*EXTENSION A

*REAL SCALE

*1 to 99

#CENTERING

>OFF

#PAPER TYPE

>NON-DESIGNATED

#SIZE MARGIN (mm)

>2

SETUP MENU

SETUP

#PORTn_HPGL

SETUP

#PORTn_DSCAN

SETUP

#PORTn_TIFF

SETUP

#PORTn_CALS

SETUP

#PARA_HPGL

SETUP

#PARA_DSCAN

SETUP

#PARA_TIFF

SETUP

#PARA_CALS

SETUP

#USB_HPGL

Note (1) DSCAN only

Note (2) HP-GL, TIFF, CALS onlyNote (3) Double or triple rolls model only

Note (4) A is displayed in the case of DSCAN.

M E N U

# S E T U P

#PARAMETER MODE (1)

>DATA FIRST

PAPER SERIES (2)

>A

#AUTO SUPPLY

>CONT MODE

#FIXSIZE MODE

>FIXD SIZE

#COPY COUNT

>1

#SUPPLY PARAM.

*OFF

*ON

*NON-DESIGNATED

*NORMAL PAPER

*TRACING PAPER*FILM

*0 to 30 A



D-4

#OFFSET MODE

>MARGIN

#MARGIN (mm)

>0

#X-OFFSET (mm)

>0

#Y-OFFSET (mm)>0

#WRITE MODE

>OR WRITING

#MIRROR

>OFF

#REVERSE (5)

>OFF

#ERROR MEMO

>ON

#SCALE MODE

>MANUAL SCALE

#SCALE X (%)

>100.00

#SCALE Y (%)

>100.00

#PEN WIDTH SCALE>ON

#DRAWING PARAM.

#SCALING PARAM.

*MARGIN

*VARIABLE SIZE

*FIXED SIZE

*0 to 100

*-9999.99

to 9999.99

*-9999.99

to 9999.99

*OR WRITING

*OVER WRITING

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*ON

*SPECIAL (6)

*OFF

*MANUAL SCALE

*REDUCE

*0.01 to 100.00

*0.01 to 100.00

*ON

*OFF

A

B B'

Note (5) TIFF, CALS only

Note (6) HP-GL only.



D-5


#FIX SCALE A

#FIX SCALE 9" (7)

#A4

>A4 *A4

*A3

*A2

*A1

*A0

#A3

>A3 *A3

*A2

*A1

*A0

*A4

#A2

>A2 *A2

*A1

*A0

*A4

*A3

#A1

>A1 *A1

*A0

*A4

*A3

*A2

#A0>A0 *A0

*A4

*A3

*A2

*A1

#A

>A *A

*B

*C

*D

*E

#B

>B *B

*C

*D

*E

*A

B

C C'

B'

C"

Note (7) HP-GL, TIFF, CALS only.



D-6

#FIX SCALE 8.5" (7)

#C

>C *C

*D

*E

*A

*B

#D

>D *D

*E

*A

*B

*C

#E

>E *E

*A

*B

*C

*D

#A

>A *A

*B

*C

*D

*E

#B>B *B

*C

*D

*E

*A

#C

>C *C

*D

*E

*A

*B

#D>D *D

*E

*A

*B

*C

C

D

C'

D"

C"

Note (7) HP-GL, TIFF, CALS only.



D-7


#PRT DRIVER (9)

>ENABLE

#GRAPHIC LANG. (9)

>AUTO

#TERMINATOR (9)

#PLAN SIZE (9)

>ON (PS)

#PLOT POINT (10)

>ON( PS)

#FORMAT PARM. (8)

#E

>E *E

*A

*B

*C

*D

*ENABLE

*DISABLE

*CHINA

*AUTO

*HP-GL*HP-GL/2

#PG1;

>ON *ON

*OFF

#NR;

>ON *ON

*OFF

#SP0;

>ON *ON

*OFF

#ESC.)>ON *ON

*OFF

#AF;

>ON *ON

*OFF

#AH;

>ON *ON

*OFF

#FR;

>ON *ON

*OFF

*ON(PS)

*ON(IP)

*ON(IW)

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

D

E E'

D"

Note (8) HP-GL, DSCAN only

Note (9) HP-GL only.

Note (10

) When the custom (PLOTPOINT) of the system

custom is ON

HP-GL only.



D-8

#DRAWING (11)

>NOP

#PAPER NO. (11)

>PAPER SOURCE

#PEN PAR.MODE

>DATA PRIORITY

#PEN0

to

N (13)

#PEN ADJUST (mm)

>-0.00

#LINE DISPOSAL

>OFF

#IMAGE SCALE

>LINE DRAW.MODE

#SCREENING (14)

>LINE DRAW.MODE

#PEN PARAMETER (12)

#RASTER PARAM

*NOP

*EOP

*PAPER SOURCE

*PAPER TYPE

*OFF

*DATE PRIORITY

*PANEL PRIORITY

#WIDTH (mm)

>n *0.00 to 16.00

#DENSITY (%)

>n *0 to 100

#CORNER

>ROUND *ROUND

*BUTT

#JOINT

>ROUND *ROUND

*MITERED

*-0.99 to 0.99

*OFF

*ON

*LINE DRAW.MODE

*PICTURE MODE

*LINE DRAW.MODE

*GRAPHICS MODE

*PICTURE MODE

E E'

Note (11) DSCAN only

Note (12) HP-GL,DSCAN only

Note (13) HP-GL is 0 to 15 DSCAN is

1 to 32

Note (14) HP-GL,DSCAN,TIFF only.



D-9


DEVICE MENU

#POWER SAVE EFCT

>HIGH

#POWER SAVE

>15min

#EDGE CUT TIMER

>OFF

#DOOR OPEN CUT

>OFF

#DENSITY

>NORMAL

#TRACE MODE

>NORMAL

#BOTTLE MAINT.

>AUTO

#SPECIAL SET2

>00

#SPECIAL SET3

>OFF

M E N U

# D E V I C E .

*HIGH

*LOW

*OFF

*15min

*30min

*60min

*90min

*OFF

*30min

*1hour

*2hour

*4hour

*1min

*5min

*10min

*OFF

*ON

*THIN

*RATHER THIN

*NORMAL

*RATHER THICK

*THICK

*NORMAL

*WETTY

*AUTO

*MANUAL

*00 to FF

*OFF

*ON



D-10

PAPER

>ROLLn

M E N U

# P A P E R .

#PAPER KIND

>NORMAL

#PAPER SERIES

>A

*NORMAL

*TRACE

*FILM

*A

*9"

*8.5"

*30x42

*MAP

*DIN

*CHINA



D-11


FUNCTION MENU

#MENU PRINT

>SYSTEM

#HPGL SELF PLOT

>PORT1

#DSAN SELF PLOT

>PORT1

#ERROR LOG

>PAGE COUNT 1

#JOB LOG

>PAGE COUNT 1

#ENGINE LOG

>

OK?

#SYSTEM DATE

>aa:bb:cc

#SYSTEM TIME

>aa:bb:cc

# FORMAT HDD

>

OK?

# FORMAT NVRAM

>

OK?

#VERSION UP

>lp1010.img Note (1)

#INIT CHARG.INF

>

OK?

#PRINT CHARG.INF

> OK?

#MAINTE INFO

>FAX PRINT

#DATE DUMP

>

OK?

M E N U

# F U N C T I O N .

*SYSTEM

*PORTn

*PARA

*USB

*ALL

*PORTn

*PARA

*USB

*PORTn

*PARA

*PAGE COUNT 1

*PAGE COUNT 5

*PAGE COUNT 1

*PAGE COUNT 5

Note(1): Applicable choices vary depending on the

contents of the CF card specialized for

maintenance person's.



D-13


RESET MENU

#SYSTEM RESET

>

#PORT RESET

>PORT1

M E N U

# R E S E T .



D-14

SYSTEM MENU

#TIMING MODE

>NORMAL

#ACK ONTIME (30ns)

>80

#ACK PULSE (30ns)

>80

#BUSY OFF TIMING

> ACK RISING EDGE

#SELECTSIGNAL

>ON

#AF SIGNAL DIRECTION>INPUT

#TIME OUT (100msec)

>300

#TIME OUT (sec)

>10

#CHANGE INTERFACE

>OFF

*ON*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

SYSTEM

#COMM.PARAM

#WEB LOCK

>OFF

SYSTEM

#ENABLE SERIES

M E N U# S Y S T EM .

COMM.PARAM

#ETHERNET

COMM.PARAM

#PARALLEL

COMM.PARAM

#USB

*OFF

*ON

#A

>ON

#9"

>OFF

#8.5"

>OFF

#3042

>OFF

#MAP

>OFF

#DIN

>OFF

#CHINA

>ON

H

*NORMAL

*FAST

*SLOW

*MANUAL

1 to 127

1 to 127

* ACK RISING EDGE

* ACK RISING EDGE

*ON

*OFF/ON

*INPUT

*OUTPUT

*1 to 18000

*0 to 99

*OFF

*ON

F



D-15


#USE A0

>ON

#USE A1

>ON

#USE A2

>OFF

#USE A3

>ON

#USE 36"

>ON

#USE 24"

>OFF

#USE 18"

>OFF

#USE 12"

>OFF

#USE 34"

>ON

#USE 22"

>OFF

#USE 17"

>OFF

#USE 11"

>OFF

#USE 30"

>ON

SYSTEM

#APPLY ROLL APPLY ROLL

#A SERIES

APPLY ROLL

#9" SERIES

APPLY ROLL

#8.5" SERIES

APPLY ROLL

#3042 SERIES

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

G

F

G'



D-16

#USE B1-MAP

>ON

#USE B2-MAP

>OFF

#USE B1-DIN

>ON

#USE B2-DIN

>OFF

#USE CHINA A0

>ON

#USE CHINA A1

>OFF

#USE CHINA A2

>OFF

#USE CHINA A3

>OFF

*914mm

*910mm

*900mm

*880mm

*620mm

*610mm

*450mm*440mm

*310mm

*OFF

*ON

SYSTEM

#CHINA SIZE

#INITIAL SET

>STANDARD

#FACTORY SET

> OK

#LANGUAGE

>JAPANESE

#SERIAL NUMBER

>00000 to 65535

#SYSTEM CUSTOM

>

APPLY ROLL

#MAP SERIES

APPLY ROLL

#DIN SERIES

APPLY ROLL

#CHINA SERIES

#CHINA A0

>914mm

#CHINA A1

>620mm

#CHINA A2

>450mm

#CHINA A3

>310mm

*STANDARD

*CHINA

*JAPANESE

*ENGLISH

CUSTOM (PLOT POINT)

>OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

*ON

*OFF

G G'



D-17


H #PORT SELECT 1-10>XLF------------

#DHCP

>DISABLE

#IP ADDRESS

>000.000.000.000

#SUBNET MASK

>000.000.000.000

#ROUTING TABLE

#SETUP DETAILS

*X

*L

*F

*-

*DISABLE

*ENABLE

*000.000.000.000

to *255.255.255.255

*000.000.000.000

to *255.255.255.255

#GATEWAY ADDR01

>000.000.000.000

#NETWORK ADDR01

>000.000.000.000

#ROUTING TABLE2

#METRIC

>064

#ETHERNET ADDR

>0800832Annnn

#CONNECTION SPD.

>AUTO

*000.000.000.000

to 255.255.255.255

*000.000.000.000

to *255.255.255.255

#GATEWAY ADDR02

>000.000.000.000

#NETWORK ADDR02>000.000.000.000

to

#GATEWAY ADDR10

>000.000.000.000

#NETWORK ADDR10

>000.000.000.000

*1 to 255

*AUTO

*100

*10

*000.000.000.000

to 255.255.255.255

*000.000.000.000

to *255.255.255.255

*000.000.000.000

to 255.255.255.255

*000.000.000.000

to *255.255.255.255

I



D-18

#CONNECTION TYPE

>AUTO

#HTTP PORT

>00080

#PORT TIME OUT

>30min

#FTP DATE TYPE

>ASCII/BIN

#SNMP

>OFF

#SNMP VERSION

>V1

#TRAPnn

#SNMP TRAP NUM.

>2

*AUTO

*FULL

*HALF

*0 to 65535

*OFF

*5min

*10min

*15min

*30min

*ASCII/BIN

*BIN

*OFF

*ON

*V1

*V2

#MANEGER

>000.000.000.000

#ERROR

>ON

#JOB

>OFF

#IP ADDR

>000.000.000.000

#PORT

>ALL

*1 to 20

I

*000.000.000.000 *255.255.255.255

*ON

*OFF

*OFF

*ON (IP ADDR)

*ON (PORT)

*000.000.000.000

*255.255.255.255

*ALL

*PORT01 to 10



E-1

Appendix E Electrical Connection Diagram


This appendix shows electrical connection diagrams of the device.



E-2

S W 0 1 :

M a i n p o w e r s w i t c h

L V P S ( P S U - L S P )

: L o w v o l t a g e p o w e r u n i t - [ 1 / 4 ]

L 1 : I n d u c t o r ( A C 1 0 0 V )

I n d u c t o r ( A C 2 2 0 / 2 3 0 V )

F u s e r u n i t

B o x ( e l e c t r i c )

H T R 1 - A S S Y

( c e n t e r )

H T R 2 - A S S Y

( s i d e )

F L 0 1 : H a l o g e n l a m p ( 6 0 0 W )

F L 0 2 : H a l o g e n l a m p ( 6 0 0 W )

L V P S ( P S U - L S P ( S )

: L o w v o l t a g e p o w e r u n i t ( f o r H D D )

3 . 5 ' H D D

: O p t i o n u n i t - [ 1 / 2 ]

[ N o t e ]

F o r t h e h a r n e s s e s

f o r w h i c h t h e U L N o .

i s n o t s p e c i f i e d , u s e t h e f o l l o w i n g :

U L 1 0 0 7 ( c r i m p e

d c o n n e c t o r )

U L 1 0 6 1 ( c r i m p e


[ S y m b o l ]

M a l e

F e m a l e C r i m p e d c o n n e c t o r

D i s c o n n e c t e d

C r i m p e d t e r m i n a l

F l a t t e r m i n a l

E l e c t r i c a l c o n n e c t i o

n d i a g r a m

L V P S ( P S U - L S P ) : L o w

v o l t a g e p o w e r u n i t 1

P a g e

1 / 1 3



E-3



: L o w v o l t a g e

p o w e r u n i t - [ 2 / 4 ]


L E D H

: L E D h e a d - [ 1 / 2 ]

[ N o t e ]

F o r t h e h a r n e s s e s f o r w h i c h t h e U L N o .


U L 1 0 0 7 ( c r i m p e d

c o n n e c t o r )

U L 1 0 6 1 ( c r i m p e d

c o n n e c t o r )

[ S y m b o l ]

M a l e

F e m a l e

C r i m p e d c o n n e c t o r

r e l a y



B u t t



n d i a g r a m

L V P S ( P S U - L S P ) : L o w

v o l t a

g e p o w e r u n i t 2

P a g e

2 / 1 3

B L 0 5 - 1 : S i r o c c o f a n

B L 0 5 - 2 : S i r o c c o f a n

B L 0 5 - 3 : A x i s f l o w f a n

B L 0 5 - 4 : A x i s f l o w f a n

I N T 5 : M S 0 6 - 2

I N T 3 : I n t e r l o c k S W


C o o l i n g c o n t r o l l e r 1 ( b o a r d c o v e r )

C o o l i n g c o n t r o l l e r 2

H D D c o o l i n g

H V - P S c o o l i n g

F i x a t i o n d o o r o p e n / c l o s e

- [ 1 / 2 ]

C u t t e r c o v e r o p e n / c l o s e - [ 1 / 2 ]

T o p c o v e r o p e n / c l o s e - [ 1

/ 2 ]



E-4




P a p e

r f e e d u n i t

F u s e r u n i t

[ N o t e ]


i s n o t s p e c i f i e d , u

s e t h e f o l l o w i n g :

U L 1 0 0 7 ( c r i m p e


U L 1 0 6 1 ( c r i m p e


[ S y m b o l ]

M a l e

F e m a l e



r e l a y



E l e c t r i c a l c o n n e c t i o n d i a g r a m

L V P S ( P S U - L S P ) : L o w

v o l t

a g e p o w e r u n i t 3

P a g e

3 / 1 3

H V - P S

: H i g h v o l t a g e p o w e r u n i t - [ 1 / 2 ]


: E n g i n e c o n t r o l l e r b o a r d - [ 1 / 8 ]


: R I P b o a r d - [ 1 / 3 ]

P M 0 1

: D C s e r v o m o t o r - [ 1 / 2 ]

P C V - A S S Y - R F U

: P a p e r f e e d u n i t - [ 1 / 4 ]

O v e r p r o t e c t

C o n n e c t o r c o l o r : Y e l l o w

F U S 0 1 : T e m p . f u s e



E-5



F u s e r u n i t

G u i d e ( i n s e r t i o n / l o w e r ) u n i t

[ N o t e ]


i s n o t s p e c i f i e d , u s e

t h e f o l l o w i n g :

U L 1 0 0 7 ( c r i m p e d

c o n n e c t o r )

U L 1 0 6 1 ( c r i m p e d

c o n n e c t o r )

[ S y m b o l ]

M a l e

F e m a l e



r e l a y


D r a w e r c o n n e c t o r


n d i a g r a m


: E n g i n e c o

n t r o l l e r b o a r d 1

P a g e

4 / 1 3



B s i d e c o n n e c t o r : Y e l l o w

M a n u a l f e e d d e t e c t i o n 1

P a p e r e j e c t i o n ( f i x a t i o

n )

P S 1 5 : R e f l e c t i o n t y p e p h o t o

( 3 : V C C . 1 : G N D P S 1 5 )

I N T 4 - 5 V : D r a w e r c o n n e c t o r

P a p e r t r a n s f e r ( s u c t i o n p a r t )

P a p e r t o p e d g e p a s s ( r e g i s t r a t i o n )

P S 0 6 : L e v e r t y p e p h o t o 2

( 1 : V C C . 3 : G N D )


( 1 : V C C . 3 : G N D )


( 1 : V C C . 3 : G N D )

F i x a t i o n t e m p . ( c e n t e r )

T H 0 1 : T h e r m i s t o r

F i x a t i o n t e m p . ( w i d t h )


O v e r h e a t p r o t e c t


S u c t i o n d u c t

B L 0 1 : S i r o c c o f a n



E-6


[ N o t e ]



U L 1 0 0 7 ( c r i m p e


U L 1 0 6 1 ( c r i m p e


[ S y m b o l ]



r e l a y


n d i a g r a m


: E n g i n e c

o n t r o l l e r b o a r d 2

P a g e

5 / 1 3


: E n g i n e c o n t r o l l e r

b o a r d - [ 3 / 8 ]

P N L

: P L C o n t r o l p a n e l

P C B - A S S Y - P S C S

: P r o c e s s c a r t r i d g e b o a r d


P r o c e s s

c a r t r i d g e



E-7



[ N o t e ]

F o r t h e h a r n e s s e

s f o r w h i c h t h e U L N o .

i s n o t s p e c i f i e d , u

s e t h e f o l l o w i n g :

U L 1 0 0 7 ( c r i m p e d c o n n e c t o r )


[ S y m b o l ]



r e l a y


B u t t




n d i a g r a m


: E n g i n e c


P a g e

6 / 1 3



T S 0 2 : M a g n e t i c s e n s o r

W a s t e t o n e r

M S 0 5 : M i c r o S W

W a s t e t o n e r b o

t t l e

M S 0 7 : M i c r o S W

M a n u a l t r a y o p e n / c l o s e

I N T 5 : M S 0 6 - 1

F i x a t i o n d o o r o p e n / c l o s e - [ 2 / 2 ]


C u t t e r c o v e r o p

e n / c l o s e - [ 2 / 2 ]


T o p c o v e r o p e n

/ c l o s e - [ 2 / 2 ]

B M 0 1 : D C m o t o r

W a s t e t o n e r b o

t t l e v i b r a t i o n

E L 0 1 : L E D A l l e y

D i s c h a r g e L E D

O N / O F F

B L 0 3 R : A x i s f l o w f a n

D i s c h a r g e r u p p

e r r i g h t

B L 0 3 C : A x i s f l o w f a n


e r c e n t e r

B L 0 3 L : A x i s f l o w f a n


e r l e f t

B L 0 2 : S i r o c c o f a n


e r ( c e n t e r )

B L 0 6 - 1 : S i r o c c o f a n


e r ( l e f t )

B L 0 6 - 2 : S i r o c c o f a n


e r ( l e f t )


M a l e

F e m a l e



E-8


D e v e

l o p e r u n i t

[ N o t e ]






[ S y m b o l ]



r e l a y



n d i a g r a m


: E n g i n e c


P a g e

7 / 1 3

P C B - A S S Y

- M E C

: E n g i n e c o

n t r o l l e r b o a r d - [ 5 / 8 ]

H M 0 1 : P u l s e m o t o r

( 1 : / B , 2 : B , 3 : / A , 4 : A )

H e a t r o l l e r r o t a t i o n

M S 0 4 : M i c r o S W

T o n e r c a r t r i d g e

T S 0 1 : R e f l e c t i o n s e n s o r

D e v e l o p m

e n t p r e s e n c e

o r n o t

G M 0 1 : P u l s e m o t o r

( 1 : / B , 2 : B , 3 : / A , 4 : A )

D e v e l o p e r t o n e r s t i r r e r

C L 0 4 : M a g n e t i c c l u t c h

R e g i s t e r r

o l l e r O N / O F F

C L 0 6 : M a g n e t i c c l u t c h

M a n u a l f e

e d O N / O F F


L E D h e a d

t e m p e r a t u r e

M S 0 8 : M i c r o S W

T o p c o v e r

o p e n / c l o s e ( L )


M a l e

F e m a l e



E-9



P a p e r f e e d u n i t

[ N o t e ]



U L 1 0 0 7 ( c r i m p e


U L 1 0 6 1 ( c r i m p e


[ S y m b o l ]



r e l a y

C r i m p e d t e r m i n a l



n d i a g r a m


: E n g i n e c


P a g e

8 / 1 3



P M 0 1

: D C s e r v o m o t o r - [ 2 / 2 ]

P C B - A S S Y - R F U

: P a p e r f e e d b o a r d - [ 2 / 4 ]



H V - P S

: H i g h v o l t a g e p o w e r u n i t - [ 2 / 2 ]


H i g h v o l t a g e

w i r e : U s e t h e U L 3 2 3 9 A W G # 2 2 .

P r o c e s s c a r t r i d g e

D i s c h a r g e

D e v e l o p m e n t

T r a n s f e r

S e p a r a t o r



E-10


[ S y m b o l ]




: E n g i n e c o n t r o l l e r b o a r d 6

P a g e

9 / 1 3




: R I P b o a r d - [ 2 / 3 ]

M a l e

F e m a l e



E-11



[ S y m b o l ]




: E n g i n e c o n t r o l l e r b o a r d 7

P a g e

1 0 / 1 3



L E D H

: L E D h e a d - [ 2 / 2 ]

M a l e

F e m a l e



E-12


[ S y m b o l ]



P C B - A S S Y - M R C 2 : R I P b o a r d

P a g e

1 1 / 1 3


: R I P b o a r d - [ 3 / 3 ]

3 . 5 ' H D D

: O p t i o n a l u n i t - [ 2 / 2 ]

M a l e

F e m a l e

P C B - A S S Y - U S B 2

: O p t i o n a l b o a r d




P C B - A S S Y - R F U

: P a p e r u n i t b o a r d - [ 3 / 4 ]


[ N o t e ]



i s n o t s p e c i f i e d , u s

e t h e f o l l o w i n g :

U L 1 0 0 7 ( c r i m p e d

c o n n e c t o r )

U L 1 0 6 1 ( c r i m p e d

c o n n e c t o r )

[ S y m b o l ]

M a l e

F e m a l e



r e l a y



n d i a g r a m

P C B - A S S Y - R F U : P a p e

r u n i t b o a r d 1

P a g e

1 2 / 1 3

S l i t t e r c u t t e r r i g h t h o m e

S l i t t e r c u t t e r l e f t h o m e

C u t t e r m o t o r

P a p e r w i d t h ( A 3 ) d e t e c t i o n




R E 0 1 : M i c r o s w i t c h

R E 0 2 : M i c r o s w i t c h

C U T M : D C m o t o r


( 1 : V C C . 3 : G N D )


( 1 : V C C . 3 : G N D )


( 1 : V C C . 3 : G N D )


( 1 : V C C . 3 : G N D )

Teriostar Maintenance Manual

Documents

Transcript of Teriostar Maintenance Manual